Adobe InDesign CC - Essentials Training Course

1. InDesign Tutorial Basics Course Introduction : Hi there, my name is Dan. I'm a Graphic Designer, and an Adobe Certificated Instructor for InDesign. I'm lucky enough to help Adobe directly... with a lot of their help videos on their website. Also, I get to speak at their Annual Conference... which is Adobe Max, which is a very cool conference. In this course, we're going to learn how to use InDesign to a really good level. Now, InDesign is absolutely one of the essential tools... for anybody that wants to work in Desktop Publishing, or Graphic Design. This course is for complete beginners. There is no need for any experience... in InDesign, Graphic Design, or Desktop Publishing before. We'll work through real world projects... starting with a simple and easy flier, to get us started. Then we'll work through a longer brochure, company newsletter. We'll make business cards... and take control of a longer document, like an Annual Report. We'll work with color... picking your own colors, and then working with corporate colors. Together, we'll explore how to choose, and use fonts like a professional. Working with images, we'll resize, adjust, and crop. Throughout the course there are projects that you can complete. You can use them just to practice... but you can also use them if you want to add them to your portfolio. As part of the course as well, there's exercise files, so you can play along. At the end of every video, I save my file to see where I'm at. That can be really handy for you... if you're getting a little bit lost, you can compare yours with mine. I'm going to give you every single design tip and trick... that I've learnt over the years... because my goal is for you to get to the end of this video series... and have all the skills necessary to make beautiful InDesign documents. This is my Blue Steel pause for a while look... otherwise I finish the video, and I rush towards the camera to turn it off. And it kind of ruins it, like this. 2. Exercise files & projects : All right. So exercise files. Hi everyone. I've just paused myself here to add some super important new information that's come out in the latest version of InDesign. InDesign has changed the initial view you see in InDesign. We all just need to make one simple change here at the beginning of the course so that it's not confusing when you get started. Everyone open up InDesign and open up any documents. So File, New, Document. Click on Print and just click on any of these. I'm going to use US letter. This is the view that you see now in the latest version, but this entire course was filmed in the slightly different workspace. It's not going to change anything we do in the course. But what you need to do is go up to Window, go to Workspace, and go to this one here that says Essentials Classic. Click on that, and it goes back to how this will look throughout this course. One other thing to quickly double-check is go to Window, go to Workspace, and once you've got these techniques to Essentials Classic, go to Reset Essentials Classic. Just read it all to make it look like the rest of this course. All right, friends, that is it. Do the workspace update and continue on, on your merry way. Let's get this guy started again. All right. So exercise files. As part of this course, they're free, you can download them from a link just here. Now, as part of this course and an addition to the exercise files, I have something called the completed files. It just means at the end of every video, what I do is I save where I'm up to and upload it to every video. You'll see a link on the page somewhere for that. You better download it and it's helpful for you if you are doing the same video and yours just not coming out the same and you're like, "How did he do that?" Or, "Why is mine different?" You can open up my file, compare it with your file and just see what the differences are in the call completed files. The other thing you can do is there's lots of, they're not called homework, but the kind of things you can do by yourself, I set some tasks. I'd love to see those projects. Depending on where you're watching this video, it might be the comments that you push, put a JPEG in of what you've done. There are some places that have special places for projects. But any which way, social media, I'd love to see what you are making. The last thing I'd like to do, it's a bit early, I know, but a review. Reviews and likes are things that really helped me while I'm doing these courses. Helped my business and helped me grow and make more courses. A review, once you're happy with the course, even if you're not happy with that, feedback would be great. Leave a review at any stage. Now could be a good time, maybe later. 3. What does Adobe InDesign do?: Now, what is InDesign? Basically, its a big Desktop Publishing. Its like a big version of Microsoft Word. Now, Microsoft Word gets you to a certain level... but never gets you to that kind of a Pro level. Its quite intuitive, you can teach yourself a bit of it. I've got a full course on Word, if you want to go check that out... it gets into a lot more of the detail. But InDesign is where you kind of... where Word finishes, InDesign starts. Now if I'm working in a design agency, or a desktop publisher... or a marketing, or a communications place... and I need to make a flier, a 1-page little flier... InDesign. If I need to make a series of business cards... InDesign. If I need to make some corporate stationery... InDesign. Magazines, brochures, short ones, long ones... if I've got a 400-page book that I'm actually producing... InDesign is the place to go. It is by far the most essential tool... in that kind of Desktop Publishing world. Some of the products for Adobe, there are direct competitors... that are just as successful... but InDesign doesn't have one. There's Quark and PageMaker which are kind of-- They're just really old versions of InDesign. You can still use those things. And they do a similar sort of job... but you'll find, in terms of an industry tool, getting a job... and just-- Yeah, InDesign is the place to be for that type of work. Now that my friends, hopefully, is what InDesign is. 4. What are the differences between InDesign and PageMaker, Illustrator, Photoshop, Quark?: So what is the difference between InDesign, and say... Quark, Photoshop, Illustrator, PageMaker, FrameMaker? There's all sorts of other programs out there. Let's quickly talk about where they all sit. In terms of InDesign, it has some direct competitors. One would be Microsoft Word, which is... it's more of an amateur program... you're not going to get a design job with it... and it has quite a lot of limitations. You can do some nice stuff in Word, but really... that's the kind of entry level program, and then you move in to InDesign. Now, other competitors to InDesign would be... the main one would be QuarkXPress. When I was learning, when I was doing my degree as a Graphics Designer... we all learned Quark. As soon as I left my degree, to get my first job... InDesign got launched... and all those tools that are-- I started actually teaching Quark way back then. And it just, it slowly, but surely, died a death. I'm sure that people who like Quark right now are-- They are still making versions, and there are people still using it... but it's a very, very small percentage of work. Pretty much, any kind of new work is all done in InDesign. Some legacy files you stumble across occasionally are done in Quark... but we don't use Quark very much any more. I don't use it at all. I haven't used it for probably about 10 years. It's a long time I dead. Now PageMaker is made by Adobe as well... and you're probably never going to touch it unless you are... it's for really big things. Say I need to put together... a scientific document about... some sort of medical treatment medicine that we're making... I might open up PageMaker... because it allows many people to work on one document... it updates it, and tracks it. If I was going to build a nuclear reactor... I'd probably document how its made, and how its been maintained via PageMaker. It's a big old program, so not a lot of people using that one. Definitely not for creative design. It's all about InDesign. The other products that might go hand-in-hand... with InDesign, is Photoshop and Illustrator. Generally designers will know Photoshop, Illustrator, and InDesign altogether. Now where they separate out, Photoshop's nice, clear, different. InDesign is a layout program. You bring in images, bring in text, and you combine them in amazing designs. Photoshop, you open up photographs, and you manipulate them, make them better... change them, mess with them, fix them up. And when you're finished with them, you bring in to something like InDesign. If I was making a flier... its a 1-page flier, and I start making it in Photoshop... I could probably get away with it, and it would be fine... and I could make it work... but that would be using Photoshop for what it's not meant to be used for. You can do basic stuff like that. But as soon as you have to have multiple pages, Photoshop just falls over. You can't do multiple pages... you can't have master pages, or headers and footers. And it doesn't deal with 'Type' very well... because it's mainly a photo editing program. So that's where Photoshop gets used. Illustrator is the one that is... its reasonably close to InDesign, it can do a lot of the same things. Illustrator is mainly for people illustrating. But what I use it for, mainly in the design field... is more logo work, and making icons. It's really kind of geared-- All the tool structure is around doing those things. But if I were to do a 1-page flier... it would look great in Illustrator, or InDesign... it wouldn't really matter to me. I'd have both programs open, check for the ones open. I'm good at both of them, so doesn't really matter. Where InDesign gets used, if its-- If I have to start doing things... say its going to be a monthly newsletter or flier... then there's some tools in InDesign... that may help the flow for doing monthly stuff. The other thing for InDesign is multiple pages. Illustrator can do it... you can have, what's called Artboards... but if you got a really image heavy document, and you start getting past... three, four, or five pages... you'll find Illustrator starts grinding to a halt. Get to 10-20 pages of images, and text, it's quite hard to use. It starts struggling as a program, whereas InDesign... you can have a 400 pages document, and fly through it, and start working. Its engineered to deal with those lots of pages. Same thing with InDesign, you can do some basic Illustrator stuff in there. There's a Pen tool, you can build shapes... and you can make icons, and import them. You can do that in InDesign, there's a bit of a crossover between those two. But if you've got to separate them out... Illustrator is for doing things like branding, logos, and illustrations... and InDesign is all about Desktop Publishing. I hope that helps with some of the softwares... and which ones you should be learning. If you're completely new to this... you can start with InDesign... and probably the next stop would be Photoshop... unless you want to start making your own infographics... and those sorts of things... then you look at Illustrator. I've got courses on all of those, so if you are keen... go check out those ones as well. Alright, that will be it... for the what, and where does InDesign sit in the world of Design. 5. How to change MM to Inches & changing UK to US dictionary in InDesign?: Hi, everyone. In this video, before we get started making this lovely flier... we need to adjust our measurements. By default, often InDesign comes with the measurement of 'Picas'. It just means that whenever-- you see this box at the top here... it's in 'Millimeters', yours might be set to 'Picas'. When I make a rectangle, all the measurements are set to that. Or if you're just switching from Imperial to Metric. So, let's go and change it. On a Mac, it's under 'InDesign CC'. Down here to 'Preferences', and then, down to 'Units & Increments'. If you're on a PC, it's similar. It's under 'Edit', then 'Preferences' is down here... it will have 'Units & Increments'. So on a Mac, that's where I am... All you need to do here is, we're going to change our 'Horizontal'. It might be on 'Picas'... and we're going to switch it to 'Millimeters'. We're going to do this course in 'Inches... just because most of the people watching my videos are American based... but you can switch it to 'Millimeters. I'll show you a cool trick while you're working to interchange between the two. The other thing we might do here is... if you're going from millimeters to inches... you might want to change the default dictionary as well. So down here, where it says 'Dictionary'... just make sure you're on the most relevant dictionary. I'm on 'English USA', you might have to switch yours to the one just up... which is 'UK English', or 'Chinese', whatever your dictionary is. Let's click 'OK'. You can see up here, that little box I showed you earlier... is now in 'Inches', when I try and draw a rectangle... it comes up in 'Inches'. Okay, quick easy short video. Let's go off and start making this flier from scratch. 6. New document in InDesign - what is bleed & slug?: In this video we're going to create our flyer document. We're going to have the page size... this little red line around the outside, which is 'Bleed'... and our 'Margins' all set up, ready to go. Let's go and do that. So, to create our document... your 'Welcome Screen' might look a little different. I've got all these documents that I've previously worked on. I'm going to go up to here, and go to 'New'. You might be on 'CC Files', or something else. I'm going to click on 'New'. If you can't see that, go up to 'File', 'New', 'Document'. We all end up in the exact same place, which is here. So, what we're going to do is... you're probably going to be working in 'Print', we are in this case. And it gives you some presets, you can see here, 'View All Presets'. There's a bunch of stuff we can use. We'll probably never use 'Compact Disc' anymore, anyway, it's in there. 'Business Cards', some useful sizes. In terms of 'Web', and 'Mobile' sizes are done in here as well. So if you're designing InDesign for Web... it's not primarily used for that, but you can. So we're going to use 'Print'. In our case we're going to use 'US'. We're going to do a flyer size, we're going to do 'Half Letter'. If you're following in a country that uses millimeters and the 'A' sizes... this would be an 'A5'. We're going to use half an 'A4', so we're going to do half 'US Letter'. And we're going to make sure-- You can see, you can override it over here. It still thinks I am in Europe, which I am. You can change it over here. Next thing is the 'Orientation', I want to put it 'Landscape'. 'Facing Pages', we're going to turn 'off'. 'Facing Pages', we'll go into a lot more details when we start building... our multiple page brochure, further on in this course... but for the moment, we're just doing a 1-page thing. Turn off 'Facing Pages'. 'Primary Text Frame' as well... it's a little bit complicated... and we'll do that in a later video as well. Just make sure they're 'off' at the moment. Number of 'Pages', you can add them later if you want. We're going to start with 1. 'Columns', we're now only going to have 1 column in this case. We'll look at multiple column layout... when we get into some more text heavy documents later on. 'Margins', we'll leave as the default. Yours might be a little bit different, I can see here, 'Margins' and 'Bleed'. You might just twirl those down if you can't see them. And I'm going to go to this 'Bleed' down here. So I've done my 'Margins', I've left them as a default, 'Bleed'. What I'll do is I'll get the real Dan to jump out... and show you this, because its better in person. Take it away, Dan. So, apparently I am the real Dan... and this real Dan would like to explain 'Bleed' and 'Slug'. This is my example book. Now what happens, when they're printing... we all know that-- say this image at the front here... goes right to the edge, the black is right to the edge. The ad on the back is right to the edge. Pretty much all of these pages... all these ads here, go to the edge of the page. But we know that when we're printing, say at home, or at the office... we can never print right to the edge of a white bit of paper... because the printer just doesn't go that close to the edge. That's the same for big, commercial offset printers as well. So doesn't really matter, you can't print right up to the edge. So what happens is... you print on a little bit of paper that's a little bit bigger. So say, it needs to be 'Letter' or 'A4'. What they do is they print it on a sheet called 'SR A4'... which is just a little bit bigger. And then they print inside of it... and then they guillotine it off afterwards down to the original size. Now, that guillotine is never perfect. They try and align it up perfect... but you need a little bit of wiggle room for the guillotine to maybe... slice it little bit higher, or little bit lower... you don't want it right on the edge... because they might end up with a little white strip. What you do in InDesign is you add a little bit of 'Bleed'... 3mm for Metric... or an eighth of an inch for Imperial... or 0.125 of an inch if you're using Decimal places. What happens is, you just make your document that teeny bit bigger. All the way around. So that the guillotine has got something to cut off, and ends up in the bin. So nothing important there, because it will end up in the bin... but it gets cut down to this final size. Happens especially with magazines, magazines are printed and bound... and often, they don't look this nice. This has got a really sharp, kind of crisp edge... but that never happens when it gets bound. That only happens after its been guillotined. Its quite messy. If you've ever seen a magazine, its been printed... that hasn't been yet trimmed up... actually, the pages are all kind of messed up, not lined up nicely. It's not until guillotining happens, and the 'Bleed' is cut off... before they look nice and tidy. Now in terms of 'Slug'... the cool thing about 'Slug' is, you just won't use it. People doing the design side often don't use 'Slug'... its more the printing or production side of things. So the 'Bleed' is a slight-- remember, just a little bit around the outside. The 'Slug' is a bigger chunk, like an inch around the outside... and in that, you can write notes. So if you're the printer, and you know that this cover is a bit special... and it has something that needs to be glued to it, on a special spot... you could write... "Here's where this gets glued to"... or maybe, this bit gets stapled to this bit, and folded over... or something special. Or, just anything that, maybe help the production later on. After it comes off the printer, it says... maybe this gets put with Part A, and Part B. It's kind of a terrible explanation, but its just notes that the printer adds. It will be trimmed off, and chucked in the bin. I've never had to put 'Bleed' on in my entire career. You probably won't do either... unless you're working behind the scenes... in an offset printer, or a big commercial printer. You won't be adding blood, uh, blood? You might be adding 'Slug' afterwards, and adding these notes to it. So 'Bleed', definitely, 'Slug', pretty much never. Did that help? Hope it helped. You can go back to the other Dan, the disembodied voice talking on the screen. So we know we need a 'Bleed'... of 0.125 inches, or an eighth of an inch. Or if you are 'Metric', you can just type in 3mm. You can see, I can type in 3mm, I just click somewhere else... and it does the conversion for me. I know its not exactly the same, but that's just the way it is. Different people use different sized 'Bleed's. And the 'Slug', we don't use you, so we're going to leave that as is. And let's click 'Create'. Stand back, we have a document. I'm going to zoom out a little bit. Zooming is 'Command -' on a Mac, or 'Control' -' if you're on a PC. What I want to do is show you the different parts here. The edge of the big white box is the edge of our page. In our case, it's the 'US Half Letter'. We've got these two other colored boxes here. We've got the red one, and this magenta one here. The magenta is the margins, they don't do anything... they're just the visual guide to keep everything inside... and away from the edges of the page. We all know that our printers don't print right to the edge... so there's like a consistent box around the edge there. The other one we're going to look at is this red one here... and that is the 'Bleed' we discussed. So everything that goes over this edge here... prepare to get chopped off, and put in the bin. Before we go any further let's go and save this document. So let's go up to 'File', 'Save'. Where are we going to save it? I'm going to save it on my 'Desktop', I'm going to make a new folder. If you're using a Mac, and its a new Mac, it might be looking like this. Looks a little different. Click this little arrow here. Find your 'Desktop'. On the left hand side, make a new folder. I'm going to call this one 'InDesign Class Files'. Click 'Create', and we'll stick... everything we make during this long course into that folder. In terms of the naming, we're going to call this one... 'Good At Heart', because that's the client. I'm going to put a hyphen in, and put in 'Flyer'. And this is going to be 'V1'. Always give it a version number... because you're going to make changes, people are going to come back. V1, V2, or A, B, C is just fine. Never call it 'Final'. Final is like the kiss of death. If you call it 'Final', the universe will send you adjustments... and you'll have to call it 'Final2' or 'Final Revisited'. There's some people chuckling because you probably... got files just like that all over your computer. So we're going to use the 'V' system. Let's click 'Save'. That's it for this video, my friends. Let's get on with the next one. 7. How to create your own RGB & CMYK colors in Adobe InDesign. : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at adding... these sexy colors over here to InDesign. We'll look at color in general, its a little bit long this video... but its the kind of stuff you need to know... if you're going to be getting into InDesign production. So let's go and add some pre-made colors. Before we go any further, let's just ensure your screen is looking like mine. So at the top here, go to 'Essentials'. If yours say something else, it might say 'Advanced', or something else... click up in this random area at the top here, and click 'Essentials'. I'm pretty sure, on a PC its over here as well. I remember, in an earlier version it was all the way over here, on the left. Double check. But find something that looks like that, make sure it's on 'Essentials'. And where it drops down, make sure you click on 'Reset Essentials' as well. It means it just gets it back to square one. This is handy when you're doing something... and you accidentally drag this, and it ends up in a weird spot. That's because everything is a bit mixed up, and you get it lost. So come back to this video, and go to 'Essentials'... and go to 'Reset Essentials', and everything comes back to normal. What we'll also do for this course is-- see these double arrows here? I prefer to have this group of tabs always out... rather than like little click-able in and out boxes. If you've got a really small screen... you might have to keep them all pushed in. For the moment, let's ignore this little thing over here. That's something I've added for us later on. What we're going to do when we're starting a new job is... we've created a new page, but one of the first things you do now... is create a new 'CC Library'. You might do 'CC Libraries' per client... rather than per job. So if you're working at one company, you might have just one. You can see, on my library I've got loads of them. All they are is a place to store things live. As you can see in this case, colors, fonts, images... and the cool thing about it is that... it's shared across all the Adobe products. You might be only using InDesign... but if you start using Photoshop or Illustrator... this library is in there as well... so you can share these colors across. So what we're going to do is... 'CC Libraries', we're going to use this little drop-down. Yours is probably set to 'My Library'. I've got couple of 'My Library' for some reason... but you've got one. I'm going to create a new library for this course. I'm going to call this one 'Green at Heart'. You do the same. Let's click 'Create'. Its just a nice empty library at the moment... but what it's going to do is, when we add our colors... we'll add them to the library at the same time... and when we bring in images, and icons, they'll go in there as well. So, to add colors-- We're going to add corporate colors. If you are just playing around, and you want to mix up any color... watch this, if I highlight this text here, and just go-- What might happen is, in this case... you can see here... that nice little rainbow thing that was here a second ago... now there's black and white, you can switch it up here... this little flat menu, back to 'RGB'... and you get that color thing back again. That happens quite a bit while you're working in InDesign... but if you've got no design at the moment... and you're randomly picking colors for the client, or yourself... you can just use this 'Eyedropper' down here... and it will randomly pick colors... and that might be great... but say you're working for a client that has specific color needs... so we're going to have to put in their corporate colors. So let's go and do that now. One of the things we'll look at is 'Swatches', our pre-made colors. Now, InDesign's given you a couple of pre-made ones... here its 'None', so empty box. There's 'Registration'... and reasonably complicated, but at our level here, we just never use it. I never use 'Registration'. We'll look at it a little bit more in our advanced class. We'll look at 'Registration' and 'Plates'. Just ignore that one for the moment. What you want to do is, use 'Black', not 'Registration'. So, 'Black', then there's white, they call it 'Paper'... because you'd imagine, if you're printing-- If I printed this, and I was expecting this to be white... but I put blue paper in my printer, its not going to actually be white... it's going to be blue, of the paper. So that's why they're all clever with the word 'Paper' there, and not white... but it means white. Then they went and mixed in some really awful colors. These are there by default, you can delete them... you can select them all, and say... "Goodbye, off to the trash can." We'll leave them there for the moment. So what we want to do is mix our own colors. Now, you're going to have to find out what your corporate colors are. You might be working at a company, and they've got a corporate manual... and it lists up their colors. You might have to ask the marketing department what they are... or their designer who's working there, or working with you. You're going to have to figure out what these colors are. Now to create a swatch... go into this fly out menu here, in the 'Swatches' panel. There's one at the top here that says 'New Color Swatch'. If it doesn't have anything-- Sometimes, I've been on my 'Type' tool... and I've got text selected, and its freaking out a little bit... so what I can do is just go back to my 'Arrow'... and I've clicked off in the background... now, I can go through and get a new 'Color Swatch'. I'll pretend I did that on purpose to show you a lesson... but really, I just got lost. Let's click on this top one here, it says 'Name with Color Value'. If you leave that on, you're going to have colors like this... which aren't very useful. They're the actual code for them... especially when you're dealing with a client... say like me, I work for hundreds of companies. So if I type in green, it could be green from any company. So I'm going to 'untick' this, and I'm working for the 'Green at Heart'. I'm just putting an acronym in there. If you're working with Disney, put in 'Disney Green'. I'm working with 'Green at Heart Red'. And what we're going to do is the 'Color Mode'. Now we're going to be using 'RGB' in this class. You might look at your corporate manual, and they use 'CMYK'. The times we've used each of them, 'RGB' is probably the most common. Especially if you're going to be designing something... that's going to be viewed on a screen. So 'RGB' is Red, Green, and Blue... and that's what your screen uses to display colors. 'CMYK' is what your printer uses to display colors. And you'll notice its a lot less... because if you've ever printed something from your laptop, and it looks awesome... and then it prints out on the printer, just a little bit washed out... its because of 'CMYK'. 'RGB', luckily has a bigger color field. It also has light coming out of it, luminance... because your laptop screen is all bright, and its got lights... and it's all going to achieve those colors like the... Toxic green, or a Madonna pink, on 'RGB'. When you use 'CMYK', it's when you're... going to a commercial printer, or an offset printer. And that happens-- Depends on what you're working on. If you're doing stuff, and it's going to be printed in the office... send a 'RGB'. Office printers love 'RGB'. Even if they're laser color printers, they like 'RGB' more. And if you're getting like 10,000 printed, at a large printing house... they'll expect 'CMYK'. They look very similar in terms of their colors... but the codes are slightly different. We're going to use 'RGB'. And here are the 'RGB' colors that I've got. So we're going to list all these out. I'm going to put in '255' for the first one, then '99', and then '88'. You see, its still at pink, but if I click out here... one of the other ones, it changes to my swatch. And what I want to do is... I'm going to add it to my library at the same time, 'Green at Heart'. You might have a different one, lots of different ones... but I'm going to add it to my 'Green at Heart' at the same time. If you're confused by libraries, and you just hate them... you don't want to use them, you can 'untick' this. Let's click 'Add' rather than 'OK'. Why? Just means it keeps this open. So I can add more colors. This one's going to be 'Green at Heart Yellow'. And add another one. '255', I'm 'tab'bing down, I'll click in the next box, '145'. Actually don't click anything, because its pink, not yellow. I think I'll add '2' at the front of this one. So ignore their notes over here. It should be '255', '255', '145'. I am going to click 'Add'. You can see there it appears in my 'Library'. It also appears down here in my swatches, both places. So what I want to do now is... pause... and go through, and add these. I'm going to get Tayla, our wonderful editor... to go through and speed this up, so I'm going to insert mine. See you then. Here we are, and when you're finished... click 'Add', or 'OK'. Either way, it closes it down. Now we need to click 'OK', so its finished. Now, couple of things. You might have clicked 'OK' by accident, how do you get back in there? You just go back into this flat menu, and say 'New Color Swatch'. If, like me, you've spelt one wrong... I've left the green off it, you can just double click it. And it opens up. Put my 'n' in, click 'OK'. If you forgot to tick the box at the bottom... you can select on these guys. See this little cloud kind of icon here? This will add it to the swatches over here. So that's the end of this super-duper, long color nerd fest. I realize we're a bit into this course... and we still just have a blank page. But that's okay. So that's it for this video. We're going to move on to stealing colors from logos. Just in case you don't know what the corporate spec is... I'm going to show you a sneaky trick to go and do that. So let's go do that in the next video. 8. How do I steal colors from a logo using InDesign? : In this video we're going to steal colors from an image... rather than knowing what the corporate colors are... because we don't know what they are, let's say... we're going to go and steal them using this handy little 'Eyedropper'... then we're going to add it to down here... into our 'Swatches' panel. But before we get started, will it be the exact color... from the brand guidelines, will it be perfect? No. Will it be close enough that nobody will notice? Yes. I don't know why I don't like stealing colors... I like these, the official numbers. But, let's go and do the stealy version. You rebel, renegade, outlaw... let's go and steal colors from a logo. Where do you get the logo from? You might have got it from your websites... or you might have it sitting on your system somewhere. Go to 'File', 'Place'. 'Place' is what InDesign calls 'Import'. Find the logo, if you're playing along in this tutorial... you download the exercise files. Inside those exercise files, is the folder called '01 Flier'. And inside there, is 'BYOL Logo'. Click 'Choose', click once on your screen... and here's the logo we want to bring the color from. So to make this thing work, what we need to do is... see this tool here... just click on the background, so you got nothing selected. Just click in the no man's land here, we got nothing selected. Then down the bottom here, on our tool bar... this one looks like an 'Eyedropper'. Click, and hold it for a little while. By default, yours is probably set to the 'Color Theme Tool'. I want the 'Eyedropper' tool. So you click, hold, hold, hold on the mouse... and then you should be able to move over here. Still holding down, grab the 'Eyedropper' tool. Now what we can do is click the bottom left, the tip of the 'Eyedropper'. Click on that once. Nothing really happens, right? But over here, on my 'Colors' panel-- doesn't really matter if its got the stroke or the fill... we'll look at that in a second. Doesn't really matter, all you need to do now is.. go to this little flat menu, and say 'Add to Swatches'. What's happened is, its stolen that color, there it is there. I'm moving to go back to my 'Move' tool, or my 'Selection' tool. And I can double click it. And that is-- I'll name the color value, 'BYOL Green'. How close is it? It is not going to be absolutely 100% perfect... but its going to be pretty damn close. So, that's the way of stealing colors from a logo. Its not going to be exact though, so you might... might, okay? There's just a big asterisk saying don't come around to me... if there's a problem, but I've never had a problem. Stealing colors from logos works just fine. I'm going to click 'OK'. You can see, down the bottom here is my 'BYOL Green'. I haven't added it to my library. So, with it selected, I can click on this, and it goes over here. But, because I don't want to do this, I'm going to delete that... select it with my 'Selection' tool. Over here, I've binned it. I don't want him in here, and I don't want it in this one either... so I'm going to right click it... and go to 'Delete'. Back to happiness... where we've got official colors, and we're not doing any stealy stuff. I don't know why I have a problem with stealing colors. I think its design school. Maybe, that sort of stuff into you, so you get a bit scared about... borrowing, appropriating, or stealing. So that's it for this video, let's get on to the next one. 9. How to color the background of a page in InDesign? : In this video we're going to make a nice big colored background. It's going to have no stroke around the outside, a little line... but a nice big colored fill. Let's go and do that. Before we get started and put the big box in the background... we need to understand the difference between a 'Fill' and a 'Stroke'. It's reasonably easy, but let's quickly look at it. We're going to use this tool down here, the 'Rectangle' tool. You got two, the 'Frame' tool, if I draw out a frame... or draw a 'Rectangle' tool... they kind of look the same. You can actually fill these guys with colors if you want to. I never ever use the 'Frame' tool, its totally up to you. The 'Frame' tool generally gets used for like a place holder. This is where an image is going to go. I never generally have that problem... so I just leave a big hole where the image is going to go. You might like this little line through the middle. I'm going to use the regular old 'Rectangle' tool for the whole course. One thing is, you might not be able to see it. It's because the last person that used your computer... might have clicked and held down this 'Rectangle' tool... and used the 'Ellipse' tool, and drawn an Ellipse. It just means its always set to 'Ellipse' now. So hold it down, you might be able to find the 'Rectangle' tool. Just draw a rectangle, any old size. It might have a 'Fill', it might not. This is where its going to come up the top here. We're going to use this option, there's a few different ways... there's this way, this way, this way... and there's this way, they all do the same thing. If you're using any other method, you're fine... but this way here, I find its easiest to learn. It just means, this top one here is the 'Fill', the next one is the 'Stroke'. So the 'Fill' is obviously the fill on the inside. So we're going to pick 'Fill'. I'm going to pick the 'Mid Green'. In terms of the 'Stroke', I'm going to click back on that little arrow. And there's the 'Stroke'. At the moment it has a little red line, red line means none. I want no 'Stroke' around the outside. Say if I want to put a 'Black Stroke' around the outside... you see, I clicked on it, it added a stroke... and you can kind of see it there. There's the stroke, its the line around the outside. To adjust the size of that stroke... you can see, just next to it, there's a '1 pt'. It's always done in points, not millimeters or inches. I can increase it up, and I can make a nice thick stroke around the outside. What I actually want from this rectangle is... I want to have no stroke. So I'm going to go back to 'Stroke', I'm going to click 'None'. And this top one here, I don't want this green, I want the light green. Awesome. If its not changing, you've got to make sure you've got it selected. So grab the 'Selection' tool... and then make these adjustments. What I want to do is I want to stretch it out... because, remember, we're using 'Bleed' in this case. We looked at 'Bleed' earlier on. What we're going to do is-- It's really hard to see the edges, so I'm going to zoom out a little bit. Zooming is 'Command -' on a Mac... or 'Control -' on a PC. I'm going to go back to my 'Selection' tool, the 'Black Arrow'. I'm going to grab this bottom right, drag it. Do I drag it to the edge of the white... or all the way out to the red? The answer is, red. Same with this one here. If I leave it just there, remember, the 'Bleed' might get trimmed... and it might leave a little white line around the edge... because we need a little bit of overhang... to make sure it can get chopped off nice, clean, crisp, and clear... and remember, anything over this edge here... is going to get probably chopped into the bin. So that is how to color a background in InDesign. There's no way of going in, and setting the default bit of this... to be anything but white. I'm going to 'undo'. And we do it with a nice big rectangle. That's it for this video. Let's go and start looking at... importing, and scaling, and flipping of images. See you in the next one. 10. Importing resizing rotating & flipping images & Logos inside InDesign.: Howdy, partners? In this video we're going to look at bringing in... images, and logos, and rotating them... and we'll look at this one, where we've cropped it... you can see, look at this, sneaky. This was actually a little bit bigger. So we'll crop them into a nice little box. We'll flip them, we'll do all sorts of stuff with images. All right, let's go and do that now. To bring in an image, icon, or any sort of visual graphic, its the same. First thing we need to do though is we need to get into the habit of... if I have my black arrow selected... and just click off in this dark gray area around the side here... so there's nothing selected. There's a more official way, you can go to 'Edit', 'Deselect All'. Its a long way. We've got nothing selected, now we'll go to 'File', 'Place'. Remember, that's 'Import' for InDesign. Pick the '01 Flyer' folder, and there's one there called 'Lunch'. Now your cursor is loaded... with this little image, and you've got two ways of putting it in there. Now when you're bringing in images in InDesign... it can confuse you when you're new. The easiest way is... over here, in the gray area, to click once. That will bring in my image at full size. If its coming in too big, you can go to 'Edit', 'Undo Place'. That kind of goes back. And what I want to do is click, hold, and drag in this gray area. Doesn't really matter how big... you can see, that's the size of my image. If its coming through really, really big... just click and drag it out to a more appropriate size. The reason I do that is-- I'm going to 'Edit', 'Undo' again... or 'Control Z' on a Mac... or 'Command Z' on a PC, so 'undone'. If I click it on this green box here... the icon changes, its a little bit hard to see. Tayla will zoom in for us, so you can see the brackets appear. It all means that if I click on this... its kind of merged them together, my green box is gone forever. You might want that, that's cool, so you can do that. What I do is-- I find that's always a pain... 'Edit', 'Undo', 'Undo'... I'm going to keep going 'undo' until... that's back, and remember, I can just click once out here, in the background. Let's look at some other things we can do with images. First of all, probably you would want to resize them. So resizing them seems easy. You grab the black arrow, grab the corner, and you drag it up... and weirdly it does that by default. Lovely InDesign. I'm going to 'undo'. So what we need to do is our first shortcut. We're not going to learn too many in this course. There's going to be a cheat sheet for loads of shortcuts... but what we want to do is learn a couple of the more practical ones. In this case, its resizing an image. And you hold down, on a Mac, it's 'Command' and 'Shift'. If you're on a PC, it's 'Control' and 'Shift'. Hold those two down on your keyboard. Grab this corner now, and drag it up... and you see, it resizes. Strange, long shortcut, I know... its just the way InDesign is, we can resize it that way. To rotate it, there's a manual rotation at the top here. This little indicator, if I need it to be 45°... I can just type it in, and it rotates. I'm going to 'undo'. If you want to do it just more casually, or you're just playing with the design... with the same black arrow, hover-- You can see, on the edge here, it does the resizing thing. If I hover just in front of that, you can see my icon changes. This little double headed arrow. I can click, hold, and drag that now, and you can see... clicking, holding, dragging... and it's more of a custom rotation. I'm going to 'undo' that. Another thing we might do is 'flip' it. At the top here-- I've got it selected, with my black arrow... and there's this option here that flips it horizontally. Sometimes it ends up all the way over here... and you have to click and drag it back across. And flipping it vertically... does it at the top there as well. So I'm going to 'undo', 'undo'... and we have got a flipped image. The next thing we're going to look at is something called the 'Content Grabber'. It's this little target that appears. Now, when you try to just move your image around... say I need to move it down the bottom here, avoid this thing completely. So I'm going to click and drag anywhere, but there, and I can move it around. If I drag this, what happens is... in InDesign, your image is actually inside a picture frame already. They are two separate things, and you can move them individually... which is quite handy sometimes... but it can be a bit annoying when you're learning. So, if I click, and drag this, 'Content Grabber'... you'll see the frame, you'll see in there... he's still there, but the picture within that frame has slid to the side. That can be quite cool when you try to crop things. And I can drag it back. I'm going to 'undo' a couple of times. Remember, 'Edit', 'Undo'. I'm going to use my shortcut. So what you need to do is, if you're physically moving it... click anywhere, but the target... but if you want to move it within the frame... you can drag that little 'Content Grabber'. I'm going to 'undo'. If you really don't like the 'Content Grabber'-- Secret note, I don't like it. And to turn this off, I go to 'View'... and I go to 'Extras', 'Hide Content Grabber'. There are other ways of copying stuff. Up to you, you don't have to turn it off... you might love it, lots of people do. What we're going to do now is look at some basic cropping. What I want to do is, I would like this thing... let's click, hold, and drag it, so its at least in the top right. It kind of snaps, its pretty clever, its snapping to the edges. If yours is not snapping, just double check 'View'. There's one in here that's called 'Smart Guides'. So 'Grids & Guides', 'Smart Guides'... that's the thing that helps it... to automatically jump to the edge... you don't have to be perfect, Pixel perfect, it will jump in there for you. So I want it definitely in the top right. I'm going to grab this bottom left... and I'm going to hold down my shortcut to resize it. Who remembers what the shortcut was? That's right, 'Command Shift' on a Mac, and 'Control Shift' on a PC... so I'm dragging it out. I want it to be at least, or bigger than our background image. So I want it snapped up in the corner there... and what I want to do is... remember, if I hold those two shortcut keys down... it resizes it, but if I don't... remember, when I grabbed it before... it kind of crops it, and that's going to work in our favor now... because what I want to do is, just grab this side, and maybe in the middle... roughly in the middle... I want it to be like this. So I'm at the bottom, I'm going to drag it out... so its just on my 'Bleed'. I'm copying bits of the image off, I know... but that's the kind of look I'm looking for. And what I also might want to do is move the 'Content Grabber'. I hated it, but its kind of handy now, look. I can drag the center of it, and you can see... I can drag it within this box, little bits. Let's bring in one more thing, let's bring in the 'logo'. Exact same technique as the image. Remember, black arrow, click in the background... so you got nothing selected, go to 'File', 'Place'. Pick one of the logos... I'm going to use this first one, 'Logo1 Full'. It doesn't have to be a JPEG, or a PNG... it can be an Illustrator file, which is another Adobe product. Let's click 'Open' Remember, in this gray area in the background... click once, or you can click and drag to get the size that you want. And black arrow... grab anywhere, but the 'Content Grabber'. Remember, if I try and move him using the center bit... weirdly the image is over here, but the frame is still over here... so I'm going to 'undo' that. Click off in the background... and I'm going to grab anywhere, but the 'Content Grabber'. And I'm going to stick it there somewhere. There's my lovely logo. Earlier I said, maybe you ought to have nothing selected... I'll show you the reason why. If I have this green box selected by accident... and I want to bring in my logo-- before I brought in this logo... so I've got this green box selected... 'File'. I've forgotten to 'deselect' it... go to 'Place', and I go... to my logo, and I click open... it doesn't give me the option of dragging it out, and giving it a size... it just kind of fuses it with this green box... which is cool, but its kind of stuck there now. They're one and the same. So I'm going to 'undo' until life was easier. So remember, before you bring it in, just 'deselect' in the background... and then go to 'File', 'Place'. Well my friends, that is working with images. Lets go on and start working with 'Type' in InDesign. 11. How to Import text from Microsoft Word into Adobe InDesign.: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at bringing in... type from Word, or an email, or look at typing it in yourself, in InDesign. We're just going to put in a bit of text here for our little flyer. So you ready? Let's go and do it. To add text by yourself, grab the 'Type' tool, this capital 'T' here. And all you need to do is click, hold, and drag out a box. Now, like we do with the images... if I start dragging over the top of boxes I've already made... some weird stuff start happening, so if I click in here... you can see, its kind of fused... this box with that box... and its kind of a bit weird, it's a weird InDesign quirk. So what I'm going to do is, have nothing selected... so click in the background, grab my 'Type' tool... and what I'm going to do is... click, hold, and drag a box over here, on the side. If you need more room, see these little sliders... we can just move across down the bottom here... and we can start typing. If I start typing over here, obviously I can put anything I like. I can grab my black arrow to resize the box to the size it needs to be. What I'm going to do is import some text. So I'm going to use this 'Text' box. I’m going to use my black arrow, just move it over here... and what I'm going to do is, select all this 'Type' with my 'Type' tool... which is the capital 'T'. Just delete it all, and I'm going to import some text. There's two ways of doing it... you can do the cave men style, which works perfectly. I'm going to jump to Word... Actually let's open the Word document. Its part of your exercise files. Find your exercise files. Here's mine on my 'Desktop', I've downloaded it. Under '01 Flyer' there's one in here called 'Flyer Text'. I'm going to double click and open it. I'm going to copy all this text. I've selected it all, go to 'Edit', 'Copy'. If you're on a PC, its slightly different... there's a copy button in the corner, or 'Control C'. Whatever you do, select it, copy it, jump back into InDesign. In here, I'm going to paste it. You can totally do it that way. Often that's what I do, you might be copying from an email, or anything. What you can do though to be a bit more official... and to get a few more options in that copy, is I'm going to delete it all... have my cursor flashing in here, I'm going to go 'File', 'Place'. I've got some text. I found my '01 Flyer', there's the 'Flyer Text'. Just kind of goes around using Word. So open, and you can see, its dumped it in there. Now the difference between the two is very little in what we're doing... but what you can do, and what we'll do later on in my more advanced sections... instead of going to 'File', 'Place'... there's an option in here that says, 'Options', 'Show Import Options'. That means, when I bring in my Word document... I get to keep some of the styles that might be in there. Maybe there's a Table of Contents, that sort of stuff. I'm going to turn that off. Hide that for the moment. Doesn't really matter how you bring in text as long as we've got some text. Now with my black arrow, I'm going to drag this box. I'm going to make the box so it kind of fits in here appropriately. Within my margins. Under the logo here. And what I want to do is, I'm going to use my 'Type' tool. Now you notice I don't jump to the 'Type' tool... I just double click inside the box... and it automatically jumps to the 'Type' tool, that's up to you. So I'm going to select it all... and I'm going to do some basic Type stuff now. If you're happy with formatting type... you might want to skip along, we're going to do some of the basics. We're going to pick a font, we'll just pick 'Arial'... because I know everyone has got Arial. I use 'Arial Bold' for bits of it. I'm going to select all again... and along the top here, you've got these two options. You might be happy with bold, and sizes, and stuff... but you'll notice that these two here have very different kind of settings... and we need a lot of them. 'Character' and 'Paragraph' is the actual names of these. 'Character' has my basic character stuff. You can see, all the way down here, there's some paragraph... it's only because my screen is very large. If you've got a smaller laptop, you might not be able to see any of these. You're going to have to jump to 'Paragraph', and you can see there. You might have to toggle between these two. I want to go to the one that says 'Align Center'. I'm going to highlight this top bit, and I'm going to make it-- My colors over here, I'm going to select the-- I'm not going to use dark green at all, I'm actually just going to use white... which is 'Paper', over here. I've selected 'Paper', I'm going to go back to 'Character'. I'm going to make it 'All Caps'. I'm going to capitalize it all. In terms of the font size, I'm going to pick a font size. What font size? I don't know. I'm going to go to about there. So '22 pt'. Go back to my black arrow, click in the background. It's maybe a bit close to this, I might like it to come down a bit. Couple of things I want to do is, I'm going to select this... make it a little bigger. And I'm going to use my green... so I'm going to use the mid green. This last URL here, I'm going to select it all, make it-- I'm going to leave it the same size, but I'm going to use the dark green. All right, black arrow, click out. And that my friends is the basics of importing text. You can either just draw a text box, copy and paste it into it... or you can go to 'File', 'Place', up to you. We're not going to go through everything... With this font selected here-- I'm not going to go through what is 'Subscript' and 'Tracking'. We'll look at some of the more advanced ones a little bit later on... but they are the basics in here... and everyone knows what right align and left align is, I hope. If you're not sure of some of the experiments... we will go through more and more as we get through this course. For the moment now, we've got our font, we've got our text in... we've got some images. Let's get on to our next video. 12. How to group, ungroup & rotate images in Adobe InDesign.: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at grouping this thing together... and rotating it, and adding some text... and making a perfect circle, well, all sorts of fun stuff. So let's go and make him in this video. First up, we'll bring in the text, you can obviously just type it... but I'm going to go to the example files. There's a folder in here called 'Discount Text', open that up. Copy it. In InDesign. Grab the 'Type' box, and click, hold, drag the box. Then hit 'paste'. Remember, I'm doing it on the sides... so that I don't end up messing up these things. So what I want to do is, I'm going to use this 'slide bar'... move it across a little bit. And what I want to do is... I'm going to 'select' all of this, I'm going to make it 'Paragraph'. Then I'll make it 'center'ed. I'm going to use the font that I'm using, I'm using 'Arial'. Of course, you can use anything. 'Arial Bold'. What size is it going to be? I've to double check. I've gone for '10 pt' at the moment. 'Black arrow'. So what we want to do is, draw our circle, and group them together. So drawing a circle, is click and hold down the 'rectangle' tool. Hold, hold, hold on that icon... until you get to 'Ellipse'. And what I'm going to do is, I could click and drag out any odd size... but if I hold down the 'Shift' key... on your keyboard, it's on the left and right, often. Hold it down, click, hold, and drag out. A circle, but while you're holding 'Shift', it makes the circle perfect. That is true of the 'rectangle' tool, it makes it a perfect [square]. So how big does it need to be? First of all, we'll give it a color, and a stroke... then we'll go ahead and play with it. It needs to be our 'yellow'. So at the top here, I've got it selected. I've got my 'black arrow'. I got it selected, at the top here, I'm going to use-- down the bottom here... it's the 'yellow'. 'Greenheart Yellow'. And in terms of the size, what I want it to be is... I've got it pretty close, actually I've got it bang on. Say you want to resize it, what's the shortcut? You remember, of course, you remember... it's 'Command', 'Shift' on a Mac, and 'Control', 'Shift' on a PC. Grab any of these corners... and you can click and drag it to an appropriate size. I'm going to get it about that size, that looks a bit good in the corner. I'm going to move it back off. Now I'm going to use this 'Type' here, stick it at the top. And we're going to run into our first problem, of arranging. So whoever gets made the last is on top. Our circle was made after the text, so it's on top. What I'm going to do is, with my 'black arrow'... I'm going to click off in the background, click on my circle. I'm going to right click this circle. If you're on a Mac, a MacBook Pro like me, you might have to use 'Control'... and click it, make sure you use the right click. Let's use 'Arrange', and let's go to 'Send'... either 'Backwards', or 'Back' will work. In our case we want 'Backwards'. If I send it to the back, it will work, goes behind it... but watch what happens when I move it across here. It's back behind this image as well. So what I want to do is, I'm going to 'undo' it, right click it... and say I want to move it, 'Arrange'. I'm going to go 'Backward', which means it's going to go back one step. And it's going to go behind this one guy. You might have to go backward a couple of times to get the balance right. I'm going to grab this. Does it fit? Not really. So I'm going to grab this edge here. I'm going to get it so it's on four lines. I'm grabbing the edge here with my 'black arrow'. Does that fit? Kind of. Now when you are moving things around, it can be a little hard... because it's trying to snap. I've got my keys on my keyboard... just the arrow keys, the cursor keys... and I will just tappity tap till I get it right. And I'm going to drag this up. If I want to select these two, and align them... I'm going to grab my 'black arrow'. I'm going to select both of these guys, and then up the top here... you'll often see it, if you can't see it... there's the tiny 'Arrange' panel here, there's an official panel though. If you can't see it, it is under 'Window', 'Object & Layout'... and you can turn this panel on. And what it will let you do is, this one here, centered both, horizontally. If yours does what mine just did, it's probably not. It's aligning to the whole page, yours is generally... by default is 'Align to Selection. So I click these guys... click this vertical one as well if you want to try and align it that way. I'm going to bring you back out here. So what I'd like to do is - I want it down a little bit. - I want to group them, so I've selected both of them... by dragging a box behind both. And I'm going to go up to 'Object'... and go to the one that says 'Group'. All that means is that I can click off, and I click back on just one of them... and I've got them both selected. I can select it and go to 'Object', and 'Ungroup' it as well... if I need them apart. What I want to do is rotate it. Remember, from an earlier video, I want you to grab your 'black arrow'... and just outside, not here... just lift it up, we can rotate. Click, hold, and drag, and I'm going to move it... down here somewhere. It's probably a bit too hard, the rotation. I’m looking for the cool, lean thing like it's a... sticker that I stuck on afterwards, but clearly it's not. All right, that is how to group things... but we also learnt how to make perfect circles... and we rotated things again. Let's get on to the next video. 13. How to make a dotted line, dashed line & borders in InDesign. : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at creating... dotted lines, dashed lines, perforation lines... we're going to do wavy lines, strappy lines, and all sorts of lines. So let's go and do that now. To put the border around the outside, we're going to start with the rectangle. The 'Rectangle Tool', not the 'Rectangle Frame Tool'. And what I'd like to do is, you saw earlier... that I had it perfectly away from the edge. What I can do is I can draw it exactly the right size. Remember, that is actually edge of the page. This bit on the outside here is the 'Bleed'. I'm going to draw the actual size, my 'Half Letter'. It's a nice big rectangle. Now, we've got a 'Fill' of green, and a 'Stroke' of nothing. What I would like to do... Actually I'll leave it there for the moment while we're practicing. If I grab my 'Selection Tool'... and I try and 'Scale' it down proportionately... What are the keys? That's right, 'Command', 'Shift' on a Mac, and 'Control', 'Shift' on a PC. If I hold them down, and make them proportionately smaller... you'll notice that if I put it here, in the middle, it's actually kind of-- it doesn't scale the way we want. We want equal distances around the outside, so if I 'Scale' it even more... you can see, it's a lot bigger on the sides... than it is at the top and the bottom... just because it's scaling that way. So what I'd like to do is, I'm going to 'undo'... so it actually fills the outside. What we can do, you can see at the top here, it's got a width and height. It's perfect, I'm half way there. What I can do in here is some basic Math. These little boxes, any of these white boxes... you can do some math in, which is really handy. So in here, I can go minus, '-' and I'm going to turn half an inch, '0.5' You'll see, it dissected in half an inch. Do the same here, '-0.5' You can do times. If I did times 2, '♪2'... this will be times 2 inches, it's that little asterisk, '♪' And it's a whole lot taller than it needs to be, I'm going to 'undo'. I'm going to go '-0.5' Minus, plus, all that sort of stuff works. To get it in the middle, you could use your line tools. There's mine at the top here, or there's a panel that we saw earlier... but actually it's just easier to grab your 'black arrow'. Click, hold... and you'll notice it just kind of snaps. You see those two purple, pinky lines? Just kind of saying, "Hey, there's the middle." And you'll see, visually it looks like it's in the middle. So it's actually '0.5'... half an inch from all the sides... and that looks nice and perfect. So, now to make the line dotted... we're going to give it 'No Fill'. So, I've clicked on 'Fill', I'm going to go to 'None'. This one here, the 'Stroke' around the outside... I'm going to make it white, or 'Paper'. And this is the 'Stroke' here. How thick it is? At the moment it's '1 pt'. It's probably what I want... but let's make it nice and big just as an example... so we can all see what we're doing. So bump it up to '4 pts'. And now we need to find our 'Stroke' panel. If you can't find it-- mine's there. If you can't find yours, go to 'Window', 'Stroke', and turn it on. Now yours might look a little different as well, yours might be... this little fire menu, that says 'Hide Options'... and if yours look like mine, you got really basic control. Click on this option, and say 'Show Options'. You get the big ugly version, with all the details that we need. What we need at the moment is 'Type'. That's going to allow us to change it from the 'Solid' line like we know it... to all these other options. There's some weird ones. Ones I've never used, 'Thick', 'Thin', you might like them. 'White Diamond', I've never used. 'Dotted Lines' and 'Dashed Lines'... are the ones we're going to look at the moment. There's two kind of dotted, there's 'Dotted'... and for some reason the Japanese like their dots a little bit closer together. Japanese thing, not sure. So there's my dots around the outside. If you want dashed, there's 'Dashed'. There's the ugly 'Squirly' line. You might like the squirly line. There's so many things in there, but we're going to go to 'Dotted. We're going to put the size down to something... I'm putting '2 pts'. You might use 'Dashed Lines' as a visual thing, like I'm doing here. There's nothing, just dotted lines, just for pretty sake What we're going to do is, maybe a snip here. The scissors, cut this bit off whatever you clip on. What you can do is... instead of doing it for this rectangle... you can do the exact same tricks with just a straight line. This straight line here, I can draw. And what I might do actually is draw it straight up and down. If you want to draw a line straight up and down... it's the similar technique we did when we made a circle. Remember, we held down 'Shift', and it was a perfect circle. That same technique makes it a perfect line. So if I hold down 'Shift' before I start dragging it out... you can see, it really wants to go up, straight up and down. So say, that's going to be my perforation line... where I want people to snip it off. It's got a 'Fill', a line can't have a 'Fill'. And the line around the outside is going to be white. I'm going to make it '2 pts' just so you can see it. And then, you can see the exact same controls. Hey, somebody's calling. Let's go to 'Dashed Lines'. I'm going to pause there, go check the phone, I'll be right back. So I'm back. This 'Dashed Line' here, I don't need it. So I've select it with my 'black arrow', and hit 'delete' on my keyboard. Just tap the key on your keyboard, and it's gone. Dashed lines, dotted lines, wavy lines, curly lines... all of that. Let's move on to our next video. 14. How best to preview your work in Adobe InDesign. : So, while we've been working... we've been just ignoring these blue lines... and these little linking icons. There's lots of blue lines around the edges of the boxes... and that can be a real pain when you're trying to align things up. Just doesn't look very nice. So, the quick and easy way to preview... and turn all that off is the W key. The W key on your keyboard, next to Q inbetween E. But for that to work, you need to be on the 'black arrow'. If you're in the 'Type' tool, you're just going to type a W. So be on the 'black arrow', hit 'W' on your keyboard. Ah, look at that, blue lines gone. You get a feel of a bit of this space around. You can still work in this view, you can see, I can click on it... drag it around... and there's nothing stopping you work like this... except, sometimes it is easy to see all the blue lines. The other thing that might throw you off your feet... if you try and work in this view... So I'm going to hit 'W' to go back out. Watch this, if I start typing something, and I go... Remember, we tap on the outside to not join them up... and we start typing. Watch this, if I go to my 'black arrow'... and deselect off, hit 'W'... Wow, it's gone. It's still there... just 'W' kind of hides all of that stuff. So that can be one of the things to note. If anything starts disappearing in this gray area... it's probably you just got to type W again. The other thing it does - I'm going to delete that - you see, the 'Bleed'-- I'll zoom in. If I hit W, can you see, the 'Bleed' gets trimmed off. To give you more of a view of say, this border. Because it's going to get trimmed off in the bin, remember. So cuts that off. I type W all the time. The problem with W is... I forget, when I'm in the 'Type' tool, and I type a W... and I won't notice, and somebody will be proof checking my work... and they'll be like, "What's a Homwe?" And I'll pretend like I don't know... somebody else did it. I know it, it's because I tapped the W key... and I was on the 'Type' tool, bad idea. The other thing we're going to check is the 'Display'. So, mine is set by default to high quality display. I think that's a fact of the new bits of software. The new installs in InDesign, if you're using an older one... we're going to look at that. So, I've got nothing selected, go up to 'View'... there's one called 'Display Performance'. So often, especially the earlier versions... I'm not sure if it's the new version or not. I'm not sure if it's settings that I've got... or whether it's remembered from my last install... or whether it's actually by default now, but let's just double check. 'Typical Display' is what it used to be set as, and yours might be. The problem is that things just look a little bit gross. You can see, the logo here, just doesn't look very nice. You know it's good quality because you've seen it in a different program... but it's not looking good in here. The reason it's often the default for 'Typical' quality... is because it tries to run fast. InDesign's trying to run quickly... so it's not producing these beautiful outlined logos... and it's the same with images. So, it's 'Typical' by default. So, what we can do, nothing selected, 'View'... and crank yours up to 'High Quality'. I work in 'High Quality' all the time, even with an 80 page document. Why? Because my machine can handle it. I've got a pretty new MacBook Pro. If you're working on a really old crappy laptop... hand me, hand me downs... you might find, actually it just can't keep up. So, you might manually go in and say... "Actually I'm going to look at everything 'Typical' quality... because maybe you're doing type amends... and it just takes so long to scroll through all the pages... so you can switch to 'Typical' quality. If you're running Windows XP on a really old laptop... that barely starts up... what you might do is, you might go to 'View'... and there's another one on there... that says 'Fast Display'. What this will do is allow you to do text amends... super-duper fast. These aren't gone. If you produce a PDF now, or print it... they'll print fine, they're just place holders... to make this system run really fast. If you are finding, "Man, this is jumpy, and slow," switch to 'Fast'. And you can toggle between if you're working with the images. One last thing about previewing... let's say you're going to present to somebody... say a colleague, or my boss... or clients, I'm going to show them my design... instead of showing them this ugly version with the blue lines... and all my swatches around here... what I want to do is present it to them. So I could make a PDF, and make a presentation, that sort of stuff... but it's actually easy to do straight from InDesign. Down the bottom here of your toolbar, right down the bottom... this last one, if I click and hold 'Normal'... 'Preview' is the one we've been toggling between when we hit W. This is the long way, if I click on 'Preview'... that is the exact same as hitting W. We don't want that one. This one here, we never use. 'Bleed' and 'Slug' will show you... a preview, but include the 'Slug'... 'Bleed' and 'Slug'. I never use these, I use this one down the bottom here, 'Presentation'. Does this, it's quite cool. Gets rid of all the junk, and just presents it nicely... kind of like a PowerPoint presentation. And if you've got multiple pages you can use your keyboard. I only have one page, but you can use the arrow key on your keyboard... and work through all your different pages, like PowerPoint. And you can actually add transitions between them all. We'll do that in the more advanced InDesign course. How do I get out of that? In it, hit 'Escape' to get back. And we are back to the ugly blue line version. 'W' All right, that's it for this one. Let's go and make a PDF version in the next video. I'll see you there. 15. How to make a simple PDF from InDesign. : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at creating a PDF from InDesign. We're going to make this super complicated one for the printers. It's not that hard. And this one here, just a pretty little version that we can email out... or send to our local printer... and share, and all that awesome PDF stuff. All right, let's go and do that now. The first thing to do is save your document, 'File', 'Save'. Next thing to do is-- if it's grayed out, it means you've already saved. This means you can't save, you've already done it, don't do it again. Next thing we want to do is go down to 'Export'... or 'Command D' on a Mac, or 'Control E' on a PC. Super easy, down the bottom here... it should probably default to Adobe PDF. We're going to use this one called 'Print'. You use that one if you're going out to obviously print. And make sure it's set to that. Give it a name, I'm going to give mine a name, and put it into our folder. On my 'Desktop', 'InDesign Class Files', this one's going to be called... 'Green at Heart Flyer V1'. Hit 'Save'. Now the cool thing about this is... this can look quite complicated, and you can make it complicated if you want... but let's just do the basics now... and we'll go through some more advanced exporting later on in the course. So check out that video, but at the moment, go on to here... put it on 'High Quality Print'... and then just hit 'Export', that's it. This will give you a PDF... that will go to a printer, and print perfectly... it will print from your office... it will be download-able, and look good quality. It will do all of those things. Let's just do a tiny little bit more with the PDF. Mine's automatically opened up in Acrobat. Yours might not, so you might have to go and find it. Mine's on my 'Desktop' in that folder we made. You might have to double click it. And yours is going to open up in some program. What I'd like to do is a couple of other things. So let's have a little look in InDesign, a little bit more detail. So, 'File', 'Export' again. I'm going to give it the same name, and override it. It won't let me save it over the top... because I've got it open in this program... so I'm going to close it down in Acrobat. I'm going to give it the same name. It's going to say, "Would you like to replace it?" If it says you can't replace because it's open somewhere, go and close it. I'm going to replace it. 'High Quality Print', set it to that, that's fine. The other thing you might do is go to 'Smallest File Size'. It's going to make it a lot smaller in terms of file size. This might be better if it's a really long document. Say it is an 80-page prospectus with lots of images... you might go to 'Small File Size' because you're sending it out to... I don't know, colleagues, to do a check. Not the final print, just some-- so it's not so big, and you can email it. That's what you need to do for that. Let's say we want to go 'High Quality Print'... but we're sending it to our commercial printer. There's two little things we're going to do. It's this one, under 'Marks and Bleeds'. We've added 'Bleed' to ours, remember... with 3mm or quarter of an inch. I can't remember, 0.125 And in here, we're going to turn on 'Crop Marks'. So 'Crop Marks' is the only thing you'll need. So I said two things, 'Crop Marks', and you turn on the 'Bleeds'. It's picked, it's remembered our 'Bleed'. You can manually type it in here... but if I say 'Use Bleeds from Document'... you can see it in there, faded out, but 0.125 And I'm going to click 'Export'. The only difference is, can you see around the outside here? These little 'Crop Marks' here are used by the printer... to slice, they line the guillotine up with that one... and that side, and they just trim it off... and that chunk in this little gap goes in the bin. So if you're sending it to a commercial printer to print, got 'Bleed'... you want to add the 'Bleed'... so all you do is turn on the 'Crop Marks' under 'Export'... and you turn on your 'Bleed Settings'. If you're sending it out to be printed internally... or if you've downloaded it from a website... you don't have to turn this 'Crop and Bleed Marks' on. Now before we finish up, let's have a quick look at 'Export' settings. There's one other thing, I just want to show you this one. I'm going to close down this guy. I'm going to give it the same name. 'Replace', I'm going to say, "Yes, please." We're going to look at these. We're going to turn all of these 'on'. Turn that all on. Why would we turn them all on? You can never turn them all on. We do it to impress people. Look at that, look how impressive and designer we look... with all these extra marks, these color bars, these registration marks. It all looks very good, the 'Time' is actually something you might turn on. And it has the document name. If I were sending this to a commercial printer... they would only want the 'Crop Marks', they would add their own color bars. These are just here to help the printer on their side of things. They've got a master color chart, and they'll print yours out. They'll put their master charts next to these colors... just to see they all kind of match. And that will mean that their printer's working well... but they wouldn't expect you to put them on. You wouldn't add registration marks either, these are used by the printer. What they do is, that registration color is actually printed... it looks black, but it's actually... say a magenta, yellow, and black all together. What happens is, if it goes to the printer... and the paper jiggles a little bit... what happens is, if they see a yellow target sticking at the side here... they'll know that the plates aren't lined up... or at least the printing ink is not lining over the top. And the image might be a little fuzzy... because these things aren't printing exactly on top of each other. But that only happens when you get to offset printing. We turn it on mainly to impress people. Say you're a designer, and you're sending it off to a client... this kind of stuff, I feel like... it's like, "Yeah, I'm a proper designer, with all these things." But if you're sending it to a printer, pull them all off. So I've got a bit of attention there. Just to recap, if you don't have 'Bleed', and you don't need it... say it's going to be just emailing to somebody... or downloading it from a website... 'File', 'Export'. Click, give it a name. 'Replace', yes please. And just pick 'High Quality Print', and hit 'Export'. If you need 'Bleed', all you need to do extra, just turn on 'Marks'. Go to 'Crop Marks', turn on the 'Document Bleed', then hit 'Export'. What you'll notice is, see it's modified along the top here... just means that, if I pick 'High Quality Print', that's all basic... but if I turn this on, you see... it becomes 'modified', you've changed it a little bit. Doesn't matter if it says modified... because we added these, we know what we're doing. We are professionals. All right, that long winded explanation of PDFs is now over. We'll go into some super advanced nerdy stuff... in the advanced course of InDesign, if you ever need to get into there... but really what we've got here... will work for 99% of the jobs you're going to work on. All right, see you in the next video. 16. How to save your InDesign file as a JPEG. : So we need to save a JPEG out, ready for some purpose. You might be sticking it into... a PowerPoint presentation, or Word document... or sending it to a website to be used as part of a web press, or something. You need a JPEG or a PNG, same principle works. The one thing I'd say is that, often a PDF will work as well. If I'm putting it into PowerPoint or Word, a PDF will go in. The nice thing about PDFs is that... the quality is always a lot better, especially for 'Type'. But if you have to use a JPEG, let's do it this way. Let's go to 'File', 'Export'. Same as the PDF, down the bottom here... where it used to say 'Adobe PDF'... go down to either 'JPEG' or 'PNG', super easy. I'm going to give it the same name... but I'm going to make a 'High Res' version. High resolution, high quality one, you can call it what you like. Hit 'Save'. I'm saving it into that folder on my 'Desktop'. 'All', 'Pages', I'm going to do 'Pages'. We haven't done any 'Spreads', we'll look at that later. Then the 'Quality'. You got two things that really controls what it looks like. 'Quality', and the 'Resolution'. 'Quality' will be how pixelated it is. Is it a bit scrappy, and a bit yucky looking? 'Medium' will still look fine, 'Low' will look gross, never use 'Low'. 'Medium' will be fine, 'High' will be pretty amazing and maximum. You won't see the difference between these two, I promise. We're going to go for 'High Res' one, 'Maximum'. It's going to look as good as it can be.. but the file size is going to be quite big. And then, 'Resolution' here... the lowest is '72', and the highest you want to go to is '300'. Anything past this, this thing is going to be absolutely big, like meters wide. We'll leave that at '300'. 'Color Space' is 'RGB'. Always going to be 'RGB' for a JPEG. And leave this stuff at the bottom. Let's click 'Export'. Nothing really happens, you got to go and find that folder... and there's my 'High Res', he's 1.4MB. Pretty big. But, we look at the quality... pretty awesome, beautiful. Say I'm sending it out, and its going to go up to a website... and I know that 1.4MB is far too big for our website... or emailing even, its pretty big. So we're going to go to 'Export', and we're going to say... make something really small. I'm going to give it a name, I'm going to call it 'Low Res'. I'm going to go through, and say 'Maximum'. I'm going to put it down to 'High'. This is the lowest you ever want to go, '72' at 'Medium'. Click 'Export'. You'll notice that... the 'High Res' version-- I'll make this a bit bigger. Probably, make it even bigger. So, '1.4' is the 'High Res'. See this one here, 'Kilobytes'... That is '0.04'. Set at '1.4', so its tiny compared to it. We'll look at the quality. It's smaller, the quality, its fine... it's not going to win the Quality Award... but this one here is really big, a really big file size. So, probably somewhere in the middle. Just find yours, go to '150 dpi', go to 'Maximum', and see what the size is. Another thing you might find is that, if you don't have any images... say it's just block colors... your file size is going to be a lot smaller... because it doesn't have to deal with all these colors. If you've got hundreds of images... it's going to be even bigger than 1.4 So that my friends, is how to save a JPEG from InDesign. Let's get on to the next video. 17. Why should I use CC Libraries in InDesign?: In this video we're going to look at 'CC Libraries'. I love them, you've been probably avoiding them for a long time. They're amazing, let's get to use them... because we're going to add things like this, logos, images, and colors. That's going to mean we can use them... in other InDesign documents, but also, look... they appear the same in Photoshop, in Illustrator, in After Effects... and all the other lovely Adobe products. Let's go and learn how to use them. First thing we need to do is... make sure you can see your 'CC Libraries'. It's under 'Window', 'CC Libraries'. Let's make a new library. I'm going to keep this one that I've got... but if you've skipped the earlier tutorial we did, when we made our colors... you'll have to go to this little drop down. It's probably going to say 'My Library', that's the one you get by default. Down the bottom here, it says 'Create New Library'. Create it, give it a name. I've called mine 'Green at Heart' for this client that I'm working for. Now let's say-- We've added these colors earlier, but let's say you've skipped that. Let's say that-- maybe this is just a new color that's appeared. So what you do is... I've drawn a rectangle... and it's filled with some random color that I now want to include... as part of my swatches. The way to do it, is have it selected with the 'black arrow'. And what we can do, see this little + sign down the bottom here? I'm in 'Green at Heart' library, I want to add something to it. And you can see, it's 'Graphic' and ''Fill Color'. 'Graphic' is actually going to add the square itself. I don't need that square, I just need the 'Fill' color. So click 'Add' for just that 'Fill' color. If I have them both selected, if I add the 'Graphic' as well... I get a rectangle. That's cool, means that later on I can draw out the exact same rectangle... and use it over and over again, that might be useful for you. I don't want him, so I can click on him, hit the little trash can, bye bye. We got two of these colors now, goodbye. It's got an ugly color that I don't want, goodbye. So, that's how to add colors, other things you can add... probably the most useful is images. There's this image here, and I'm going to add it... so that I can use it in lots of other documents. This library stays there, doesn't matter what document you have open. If I go to a new document... 'File', 'New', 'New Document'. Click 'Create', you can see, these are still here... allowing me to quickly grab our colors and stuff. Let's go back to this one. Now adding images can be interesting. If it's just the image by itself, you can just click, hold, and drag it in. You can see, I've dragged it because I've already cropped it. You can see it's dragged the cropped version of it. The image is actually quite big. So what you can do is, double click the image. You can kind of start to see, it's spread out to this red edge here. That means I've got the whole image selected, and down here... Now can I drag it? I can. So I've just dragged it by double clicking it... and you can see, that's the entire image, so I'm going to download this guy. This is my 'Food' image. So you can add images that way. Other things you might add... say this logo here, I can select it... and because it's not cropped, I can just drag the whole thing in there. That's my 'Logo Green'. You can add blocks of 'Type'. Like this one here, say this little round thing I've made. I want to use it over and over again. It's something like our 'Call to Action', or our unique selling point. I'm going to click, hold, and drag it. You can see, the whole unit comes with me. So if I go to this next document... and I go-- I want to quickly build a thing. I can drag out... an A4 page, I can go up the top here. I can click on 'filling with the green'. Actually, dark green, drag the logo out. I can add my image... and this little round thing. You can see how quickly I can start building extra documents... because you've got everything in this library. Gets even better. If you jump out to another Adobe product, so I jump into say, Photoshop... I'm working on this, and say I need that color, or... you can see this is another library that I'm working on... but if I switch to this one here... 'Green at Heart', you can see, he's in this one as well. I can use them across all these documents. Here you go, I'm not sure why... this drawing that I've done needs round-alls and stuff... but you get the point, right? You can go between any Adobe product. I use this a lot between my video work in After Effects and Premiere... or my graphic design work at Photoshop... or Illustrator, they all use the same libraries. One last thing to consider is that... say you are a freelancer, or you're beginning a freelancing role... it means that when you sign into another computer... and you use your Adobe ID... these libraries will pre-populate. So if I go into an office, and they say... "Dan, I want you do some work with us, and you can use our machine." So I jump on their machine... and even if they don't have the license for it, I can download a trial... and log in with my user name and ID... you can have it installed on more than one computer. When it opens up, the trial version becomes a full version... because I'm a paying customer... and all my libraries pre-populate with the stuff that I use. That can be really handy when you're switching machines, it all syncs up... and it also does cool things with some of the Adobe apps. Go check the App Store... there are some cool things that libraries work with them too. So libraries are awesome. You've probably seen them in lots of Adobe products, and ignored them. Start using them because they are wicked, wicked is not the word. I take that back, they are awesome, or great. Terrible ending over, next video please. 18. How to share your InDesign files with others by using package document.: Hi there, in this video we're going to make a nice little zip file... that we can send to people, and inside that zip file... we have the InDesign file... plus all the links, and fonts, and images... all ready to go, so I can send it off... to my colleagues so they can start working on the file... or it might be that I'm sending it to myself... to my home computer, to start working on it... or I might just be packaging it all up... to archive it, and take it off my machine... so that I can get on to the next job. Let's look at this packaging InDesign files... ready for other people, in this video. To share our InDesign files, we need to use the 'Package' feature. So let's go to 'File', 'Package'. Make sure it's saved first. Leave all of this, click 'Package'. Ignore 'Printing Instructions', nobody uses this. It's meant to be for notes that you gave to your printer. "Contact me if the printer is ready." But you'd be doing that by email, not sure if anybody uses that. 'Create Package Folder', this is going to be an actual folder... that's going to group everything, and stick it in. I'm going to put mine on my 'Desktop', in my 'InDesign Class Files'. The name of it... I'm going to give mine a different name, I'm going to call mine... 'Green at Heart Flyer - Packaged Document'. 'Packaged Files', that's better. We're going to leave all of these ticked... and we'll look at them all when we're finished. Let's click 'Package'. It says, "Do not share fonts, it's illegal." But we need to share the fonts, because we paid for them. So we ignore that, it's a gray area. So let's jump to our 'Desktop'. And you can see, there is my 'Class' folder... and there is that folder that's been made, 'Packaged Files'... so let's see what's in here. Let's go inside, and there's a bunch. The InDesign file is the main thing. That is the bit where I'm going to send it off to one of my colleagues... and they're going to start working on it. They're going to double click the 'indd' file... the InDesign file, and that's what's going to open it up... and they're going to be able to start working on it. A PDF there is just for visual. Just to kind of get people... like a little quick visual... without having to open up the InDesign file to see what it is. You don't technically need that, they're just helpful. Same with this file here, the 'idml' file is just helpful. Say you're sending it to Jeff... and Jeff is going to try and open it... but he's using a super old version of InDesign. It means that he might try and open 'indd'... and it just comes up with lots of error, saying... "No way, Jose, my version's too old," or too new. He can open up that version. Will there be any problems? Probably not, if it's a simple document. If you're doing some hard core animated interactiveness, then maybe... but we're not at the moment, so it should all work out fine. The important things are these 'Font folders' and 'Links'. These are really important. The 'Instructions', we kind of ignore that. So I'm going to delete it, we don't write anything in there... it's meant to be printer instructions... tell them what to do, how to contact you. So, 'Fonts'... you can see here, there was that-- remember that warning that said... "Hey, you sure you can share these fonts? Be careful, check your licenses." And you should. But this is how to get people a document... and the fonts that are used in it... so it doesn't come up with font adherence. So we'll send these to them. And the 'Links'... 'Links' are just considered... you can see, here is the logo, and this graphic I've used in here. So all of these are super important. So if I adjust it in InDesign file... it doesn't have... it's going to open, but it's going to say... "Hey, hello, I'm missing the fonts." "Hey, hello, I'm missing all the images." So you want to send all of this, so what you tend to do... is this, that folder that got packaged... we were just inside there a second ago... is you right click it, and if you're on a Mac, you go to 'Compress'... and if you're on a PC, I think there's a 'Send to Zip File'. You might have to look through your options. You're looking for a zipped or compressed folder. Click this, and see this zip folder, that can be emailed. You can't email a folder, weirdly... but you can email the zip folder. Or it may be just backup. You're working in an agency, and you're trying to keep everything... you're closing it off, and you want to turn off your computer... but you know that the images are all over the place... and just want this tidy little package that you can archive, and say... "Job done, delete off my computer"... is you package it up into a folder, send this one. All right, my friends, that is how to package a document... and send it to people without having lots and lots of problems. 19. Class Exercise 1: So now its homework time. Well, not homework, it is class exercise time. I'd love for you to go through and do this. When I'm running my in-classroom training... I find this is the most valuable part of the whole experience. Instead of following me step-by-step... you run into problems, you'd be able to fix them yourself. Now, like I do in my classroom training, I've got a checklist. I'd like you to do all of these things. So set aside a little bit time now.. 15 minutes, 20 minutes, it might take you an hour... depending on how fast you're picking it up. The nice thing is you get to do it at home at your own pace. So, go through, and do every single thing on this list... and when you're finished, you can use this thing in your portfolio. You have permission, you can use this in your portfolio... and say this is something that I've made, and it is. What I'd also like you to do is, send me a copy. You might follow this verbatim, and that's totally fine. I just want to see that you've done it, send it to me. Depending on where you're watching these videos... often there's comments, or class exercise part, stick it in there. Either the PDF, or the JPEG version, or even a screenshot. I'll just work you through this list... so let me quickly help you with what you need to do. Its a new document, easy... but in that new document it needs to be 'US Half Letter', or 'A5'... depending on which part of the world you're in. Needs to be a 'Bleed' of 3mm or an eighth of an inch... depending on what part of the world you're from. 'Facing Pages' is going to be turned off. We're going to make a 'Landscape'. I want you to create your very own new library... for this client here, called Green Gardener. Add the brand colors, you'll see that in your exercise files, they are there. There is something called-- in '01 Flyer'... there's one called 'Class Exercise'. And in here, are your colors, there's the colors there. There's the checklist that I'm reading through now as well. You can read through at your own time if you don't want to pause this video. And here's some other bits. This is the finished file that you can see in the background here... so you can use that as an example if you get lost. Other things you need to do, add those brand colors. Add them to your 'CC Library'. You need to use a logo that's in there... and one of the images, there's three to pick from. You can use your own, its totally fine. You can use your own logo, your own colors, I'd love you to do that. But if you just want to charge on, and finish them... you can just use the example stuff. Your image needs to be cropped like this one. It's a lot big, we've cropped it down using our special tricks. I want you to make the heading 'upper case'. I would like you to put a 'dashed border', we used a 'dotted' one earlier on. Create a 'Round all'; 'Round all' is a name of this... like this little round thing with some text in it. I want you to create this with a perfect circle. I want you to 'group' these two together. I want you to 'rotate' them around. Then I'd like you to save and name your file, maybe using the 'V1'. And I'd like you to create a 'PDF with crop marks'. And then send me a version of it, I'd love to see it. Now, if you get stuck with anything... please drop me a comment, or go back through the previous videos. The previous videos will cover everything we've done in here. If you do get lost though, and you're not too sure... drop me a message, and I'll give you a hand. Now, I promise you... I've been teaching InDesign for about 12 years now... and its the people that actually take the effort... and do these little extra examples, are the ones that pick it up the most. Following me step-by-step is awesome until you run into a problem. Go ahead, do this one. Send me a screenshot, send me a sample. Even if you don't, just keep it on your site, keep it for your portfolio... but make sure you do it. Alright, let's go on to the next project. Exciting. 20. Ideas, Inspiration & starter templates. : So when you are getting started with InDesign... you might also be getting started in InDesign in general... so getting ideas for layouts can be quite tough. So inspiration is how you grow really quickly. So look at the best people around, see what they're doing. We're not copying here, we're getting inspired by... and we're appropriating their ideas... and using our content, our own fonts, our own colors. So, just inspiration. The places to go, Pinterest is an easy one. It's the one here in front of me, I put in magazine spread. 'Spread' is two pages side-by-side, and gives you an idea of... just kind of ideas, you might get started. You can, once you've signed in... you can start pinning them to your own boards... and you'll have a collection of things you like. I like another version. Very similar to Pinterest, niice.co I like this one. I find better layouts, I've done the same thing. I've done social magazine spread. Just removes the Pinterest branding from it. I like this site. Just like Pinterest, you can have boards here. And when we get them all together-- Let's have a look at one of my boards, 'Hand Drawn Type'. You can see here, he starts gathering ideas to get your job going. Another really good one is Behance. Behance has some other perks, other than just inspiration. I've done magazine spread in here. This is the place we're going to look at later in the tutorial for your portfolio. This is where people get found as designers more and more. Another perk in here is, often they'll have-- See this one here, it's not somebody's work so much... as it's a photo realistic catalogue magazine. You can download and start using it, like a little template. One of the problems often is, you'll see this... and you'll say, "Great, here's a really cool cover. I really like it." But you have a different project. Somebody's come to you, and said, "Hey, here's the cover"... and they haven't said, "Here's three words to put on it." They've said, "I want you to fill the cover with two pages of Word document." And you're like, "Ugh." You don't get to do lovely negative space in big blank areas... because you got to fill it jam packed. I find the best inspiration for those kind of text... the annual reports, brochures, kind of really text heavy stuff... is to Google 'Annual Reports'. Someone who have Googled here have typed annual report, just add the word pdf. Probably, just the companies have to go and report their annual reports online. You'll find lots of stuff around, I've just clicked a few of these. I don't even know what CRH is, I'm just looking at how they're getting around... but you see, there's a lot of data that had to communicate. They've done some really cool infographics. They've gone for a 3-color layout. I'm just looking at it for inspiration. Just thinking, "I never considered big type down the side, big image." So, getting ideas from this, it's BMW's one. You can see, somebody is going to hand you a thing like this... and you're, "How am I going to show in this Excel graph... and actually make it legible?" You can see, here they've done a really nice job... of clarifying the year that we're at. And yeah, just work through some of these really text heavy documents. And get an idea about how you might approach it. Another thing you can do is use a starter template. InDesign especially, if you go to 'New', or 'File', 'New'... you go to 'Print', and let's say we're doing a brochure or a magazine... you'll see, underneath these blank documents we have these templates. If you're using an older version of Indesign it doesn't work. But here we've got some templates. Let's say we are doing some sort of... you can see, there's a jacket, a food magazine layout, let's click on this. And let's click on 'See Preview'. It just gives you an idea, and you're like... "I like this, I might start with this." You can totally use this, and just switch out the images... there's nothing stopping you. What you'll find is, you'll end up adjusting it to suit your taste... and your content, and it will change quite a bit. You'll be able to take ownership of the design. All you do is click 'Download'. You've got to be connected to the net, it takes a little while, but eventually-- The only difference is that these images won't be there when you open it. You can see now, it's downloaded. Click 'Open'. It's using fonts we don't currently have... we're going to look at this in fonts a little later on... but we're just going to click 'Sync Fonts', and hit 'Close'. And you've got a magazine layout. The only trouble is, without the images, this doesn't look as pretty. But hopefully you've got access to some images for your work... otherwise, you're going to have to go to stock library sites... and start filling it in. That's a nice way to get started. Now my parting advice for somebody... who's a little stressed out for getting designer ideas... is that it does get easier. Nobody's born a good designer... but now you got an interest, and you've got some tools in this area. You'll start keeping an eye out for designs that you like... fonts you like, colors you start liking. And what will happen, after a few projects... you'll start knowing what clients like, and what they don't like... and what's worked, and what hasn't. And as you get more experienced... you'll start to be able to pull designs out of thin air. But you're not pulling that of thin air... you're pulling out of past experiences... successes, wins, losses. That's going to be it for our inspiration section. We're going to go through on to the next section... where we'll start updating somebody else's file, very important. 21. Working with other people's InDesign documents, missing images.: Hi there, in this video we're going to work with... a file that's been sent to us by somebody else... and we're going to have some issues with the images not being loaded. And in the next video we'll look at where the fonts are not being loaded. First of all, let's go to 'File', 'Open'... and download the exercise files... and in there is a file called '02 Existing Work'. Open that up, and there's 'Green at Heart Prospectus', open that up. And, warning, we're missing some images. It might say modified. Let's click 'OK'. It also might say we're missing fonts, and we'll do that in the next video. Basically this is what we've got. We have a document, but these images are missing. The weird thing is that I can see them, they're right there. Why can't I use those? Is it that they print really badly? They look okay on screen... but they print really badly, so we need to link them back up. Now this highlights one of the differences between InDesign and Word. Word, when you put in image inside of it... it kind of just packages it into the Docx file. When you send it to somebody, it comes along with it. With InDesign, by default, it likes to link to the images. Why do we do that? It's so that InDesign can run super-duper fast... when it's only linking to it... whereas Word, if you work with a really big Word document... with lots of images... you'll notice it runs really slowly, so that's the difference. So when somebody sends you an InDesign file... be expecting the images to be along with it separately... often, in a zip file. If you just get the InDesign file, and no images, you're kind of stuck. So you need to find those images, they might send them later... or they might just be hiding somewhere on your computer... or the network drive at work, something like that. So we just need to relink them. So let's do that. Over here, you can see... my 'Links' panel, if you can't see it, go to 'Window', 'Links'. These are the images that are contained in my file. Now these ones have got the big red question mark... that means they are completely missing, so we're going to relink them. Yours might just say modified, mine had a yellow caution symbol here. Often you can just click on them, and this one here which says 'Update'... and often there'll be no difference. You click on it, and our image will reload, but nothing will change. Often, that's just a quirk between Mac and PCs. Sometimes it's to do with the time zones. Often there's nothing different, keep an eye on it, just to check... but often there's no change. In my case though, missing this completely. So, I'm going to try and find this 'Green Logo1'. I'm going to select it... and down here, there's this little chain icon, called 'Relink'. Click on him. And what I've done in your exercise files is... go back to the parent folder... and in here, there's this one here called 'Missing Footage'. Not sure why they call it footage. It should be missing images. And, in here, there it is, 'Green Logo1'. I'm going to click 'Open'. And it's gone and replaced it. Now you can select more than one... so I've selected the first one, holding 'Shift', clicked the second one... go to 'Relink'. It's looking for this first one here called 'Table Top'. So I'm going to call this one 'Table Top'. Click 'Open'. And then I'm going to click this one that says 'Black'. Nice. So they're relinked, they're ready to go. They're not missing anymore. What you might find is, this word 'Content' here is pink. Looks kind of strange, it's because you're missing the fonts. So let's go in the next video... and look at missing fonts, and fixing those. 22. How to find missing fonts in InDesign? : In this video we're going to look at what happens... when you opened up somebody else's document... and it says you're missing fonts. It's missing images as well, but we did that in an earlier video. I'm going to close this down. And you'll also notice that... there was this horrible pink color, that is missing. So let's go and do that in our tutorial. In this video, we've been sent a file by somebody... but the fonts have come up missing. So if you're following me along with the exercise files... open up '02 Existing Work'. Open up 'Green at Heart Prospectus'. It says missing links, which we did in a previous video... so go check that one out. Now, we're going to deal with this one, missing fonts. Now, this can be a super easy fix, or this can be super complicated. Super easy means, it's a font that actually exists on Adobe's Typekit. Typekit is the name that Adobe calls it's font library. And what can happen is, it can load up, and it senses... you don't have that font on your machine, but it says... "Hey, I've found Roboto Slab Lite on Typekit... and because you're a Creative Cloud member, and awesome... would you like me to download it, and install it for you? And you can click 'Sync Fonts', and life is good. Where life is harder, it's when it has no syncing here... and it says, I cannot find it anywhere. So what you need to do is, you need to click on this 'Find Fonts'. It's going to tell you, in our case, it's Roboto Slab Light that's missing. And what we can do-- I can click 'Sync Fonts' here because it's on Typekit... but you might not have that option, often it's not. So what you need to do is, do one of two things. You can replace it with something else... because sometimes, if you're working across Mac and PC... say somebody's used Times New Roman... Times New Roman is what a PC calls Times New Roman. A Mac, for some reason calls it Times. Same font, same attributes. So you might have to go and say-- actually, Roboto Slab, I'm going to go into my list. This is the list on my computer, and find it, you might just have it. It might be the Pro version, so you might have... you might have Roboto Pro, or something slightly different. And you can go replace it, and you keep an eye on it... and see if the font changes, it might be exactly the same. Or you might have to go through and say... "I don't have Roboto Slab, I'm just going to use Arial." And I'm going to hit 'Change All'. And it's going to go through and switch out every use of Roboto for Arial. And that's a sad day, because Roboto Slab is nice. And Arial is not nice. Another thing you could do, is actually just ignore this, hit 'Done'. Don't care about it, and it's going to go, this pink color... I know, there it is there. So I got 'W' on, off. And it goes, this kind of horrible pink outline color. Say I'm just doing a text check. I've sent it to somebody and they're just doing a quick check of the text. They're missing their fonts, don't worry, just leave it missing. Send it back to the person who originally owned it... who does have the font, and it will come back to life. If that's still not fixing your problems... you're going to have to install the font. You get a package document from your designer, or whoever made this. It will be a zip file, and inside of it will be-- Let's look at an existing one I've got. So we look at our 'Desktop'. 'InDesign Class File', we made this packaged file earlier. So somebody might have sent you this... and inside here is the 'Document Fonts'. You might find that he's there, and all you might need to do is double click it. And depending on what program you're on, I'm on a Mac... and I can just click and install fonts. If you're on a PC, it's a very similar process. What I've done for this class is, in your exercise files... under 'Missing Footage', there's one called 'Roboto Slab'. In here, all the fonts that we need, in this case it's Roboto Slab Light. If I go and install this one now, life should be okay. Go back in here, sprung to life. If you don't have that font, and it hasn't been sent to you... you're going to have to probably buy it. Some fonts are free, lots of them aren't. If you're going to go and buy it... I can recommend myfonts.com, this is where I buy my fonts. Fonts aren't cheap, it all depends. People do a lot of work on these fonts... So say I need a font, and I need to buy this vintage one that's been made. You can see here, this one here is going to cost me €27. Bigger fonts, by that I mean, it has a whole lot more characters and whites... then you're going to pay more. But this is a good place to go buy it. But there are plenty of other places, pick whichever one works for you. I hope one of those options helps you with finding a missing font. Let's get on with this tutorial series. 23. How to replace images in InDesign?: In this video we're going to look at switching out images. So we're going to switch this one with this one. Let's go do that. Obviously, updating somebody's text is super easy. Grab the 'Type' tool, select it. Change it to the date. Selecting images, just as easy, I'm going to click on this image here. Doesn't really matter actually, if I click on it, it highlights it over here. I can have nothing selected, and select it here. I know that that's the image. 'Gardening Tools1', but let's say I'm replacing it with a new cover. I could delete this and bring in another file... and try and stretch it around... but what we're going to do is something a little bit easier. I'm going to 'undo' that. So with it selected, I'm going to read 'Link'... and instead of what we did earlier... which was relinking to a missing file... I'm going to go into our 'Exercise Files'... go into 'Existing Work', and there's 'Replacement Image'. I'm going to go switch it out. Now what we're going to do is grab our 'Content Grabber'. Kind of move it around, reposition it how we want. I might have to zoom out often... that is helpful when you are repositioning images in different sizes. So I'm going to hit 'Command -' to zoom out. You might hit 'Control -' if you're on a PC. I'm going to use my 'Black Arrow', click on it. And if I click on the 'Content Grabber', you can see... it's actually quite a big image, so what I might do is... hold down 'Command - Shift' to resize it. Bring it down lower as well. And shuffle it across. It's my new cover. All right, super easy. That's it for this video, let's get on to the next one. 24. Opacity, transparency and see through ness in Adobe InDesign.: Opacity, transparency, see through-iness... is what the title of this video is going to be. And it's so that, this black box here, you can kind of see through. It's helping me see the text against this. I've done it with these green boxes here, you can see through a little bit. I'll watermark this logo. Page 2 is a big black box that is transparent. Let's go and do that now. First thing we're going to do is grab the 'Rectangle Tool'... not the 'Rectangle Frame Tool'. Before I start drawing anything, I'm going to-- What you might have to do is make sure you have nothing selected... then go to the 'Rectangle Tool'. Make sure the 'Stroke' is set to 'None'. And the 'Fill' of this box is going to be set to 'Black'... not 'Registration', registration's bad. And I'm going to draw a box, roughly to go on the outside. Now, it's on top of my 'Type'... so I'm going to grab the 'Black Arrow', right click it. And I'm going to go to 'Arrange'. I'm going to 'Send Backwards'. And by chance, I only have to go back only once. Often, you'll have to right click again... and go 'Send Backwards' until eventually you get behind the white type. It depends on when this thing was added to the document. Because it was last added, it's on the top of the stack... so it's easy to get behind. Next thing I'm going to do, I'm going to adjust this. This lady over the side here, because... we don't want a black box covering her... but what I'd like to do is lower the opacity. Now, I just have her selected with my 'Black Arrow'... and up the top here, there's this one called 'Opacity'. And I'm going to slow it down. Slow it is not the word, but I'll lower it anyway. You decide how it's going to work with the background image... and how low it should go. I might do the same for this green box. So, go and do that, lower this one down as well. It's just for style points. Kind of looks cool, having it partly see-through... and it's the thing for this book you can see here on page 2. This big black box here, just a kind of a cool way... of having text on a black background. And we're kind of showing part of the image, yeah, style points. Now we've done it for black boxes, you can do it for anything. You can select anything, lower the opacity... and have washed out text. It might be watermark for the logo... so let's add this guy down the bottom here. I'm going to shrink it down. Move him down here... but I'm going to lower the opacity... so he's like a little watermark thing in the bottom there... which I don't like. But anyway, that is opacity. Let's get on to the next video. 25. Why is InDesign adding [Converted] and making me save as. : All right, I just opened a file... it's an older file that I've been working on... and it's come up with this thing that says 'Converted'. Now I try and save it... and it says I got to do a 'Save As'. It won't let me save it over the top of the thing I just opened. Why is that? It's because InDesign is updated between... when you created this file, and where it is now. It might be six months ago, it might even be two months ago. And there is nothing we can do about it. So we just have to live with it, we just go 'File', 'Save'. And just give it the same name. It will say, "Would you like to replace?" And you say, maybe. What you might do before you go and replace it over the top-- I'm pretty confident, I always do it, and I never had a problem. I do not want to get you into that problem. I'd like you to go off, make a copy of it somewhere... stick it somewhere hidden in case this all goes horribly wrong for you. At least you can go back to that original. For me, I always replace it with the same name... and I don't have any problems. Just upgrading it to a newer version of InDesign. Maybe we just have to live with it. And that is all, let's get on to the next video. 26. What if I can’t find the InDesign file - can I open the PDF?: Okay, let's say we can't find the InDesign file, we only have the PDF. Can we open up the PDF in InDesign, and start editing it? No, it's not possible, you can place it... and it will stick it in like an image, but you can't adjust it. The way to adjust it is that... hopefully you're a Creative Cloud subscriber... and you've got something called Acrobat Pro or Acrobat DC. If you don't have that installed, go and do that. On my Mac here, there's a little icon, 'Apps'. Mine's called Acrobat DC, that's the current version of it. And if yours is not installed, install it. On a PC, I think the same icon is in the bottom right. And what you want to do is, find your PDF... download it from your email, or wherever you've got it, and right click it... and say 'Open With', and make sure it goes into 'Adobe Acrobat'. Now, because this is the Pro version, and the paid version... mine's called Acrobat Pro DC. If yours is Acrobat Reader... it's not going to do any of this. But because you're a Creative Cloud license user, it's going to work... and what we're going to do, over here on the right is one called 'Edit PDF'. Now, don't get your hopes up too much, you can do additions... you can add images, but can't start swapping around... and using it like InDesign. It's very, very cave men. Now I'm going to make sure I'm on 'Edit'. Along the top here, let's say our address has changed... I can change it to '100'. It's really slow, and clunky, and jumpy. So I can do that, no problem. I'm going to scroll down a little bit. And you can see here, let's say I just need to change this... so it's just a typo or price change. Jumpy, jumpy, that's okay. So you can do basic stuff in here. Basic formatting, you can add images, add text. Add text, click and drag out a box. Adding text. I'm still waiting for this to catch back up. Mine's a pretty hard core Mac, and it's a little bit dead Hey, here it is, it's back. So that's kind of last ditch... you just want to make some basic amends... and you don't have the InDesign files... you can do it here in Acrobat Pro. Now we've done it in Acrobat Pro. This method works in Illustrator often as well. Illustrator has some pros and cons to it. A little bit harder to use Illustrator if you've never used it before... but there's a little bit more formatting and layout changes you can do... so try either this one, this is the easy version... or Adobe Illustrator... and open your PDF in there, and make changes. All right, that's it for this video. I hope that's helped. Let's get into the next tutorial. 27. Creating a new company newsletter or brochure, what are spreads.: In this video we're going to create our newsletter, or our brochure. We're going to work on our margins, our columns, the gutters between it. We're going to look at things called spreads. It's going to be exciting, let's go and do it. First thing we're going to do is create a new document. Either click this button, or you can go to 'File', 'New', 'Document'. We're going to start with some of the presets, Print'.. Depending on the part of the world... we're going to use 'A4' or 'Letter'. We'll use 'Letter' in this case. You can see, mine keeps defaulting back to millimeters. It's mainly because, in between making videos... I've to do work in InDesign, and I work in millimeters... so I can switch it back. So there's my sizes, I'm going to work in 'Portrait'. We're going to have 'Facing Pages' turned on this time. Remember, pages, we're going to have 8. Just consider when you are making a newsletter or a brochure... often you have to work in multiples of 4. You can have 2 pages. So, front and back of 'US Letter'. Also, when it gets past that... it's actually big sheets of paper folded in half, and stapled. So you can't have like, say 6 pages... because you'll have one big sheet folded in half. And then you have this kind of one sitting in the middle... and it becomes really hard to bind together. There's ways around it, but often you work in multiples of 8. If you ever pulled up a newspaper, and pulled one sheet out of it... you've dropped it to pieces, and you've pulled out one sheet... you'll notice there's actually 4 sides. So, think of that when you are doing a newsletter. Definitely don't do 5... because you've got the back of a sheet of paper that you have to use. Starting number? This might be that you've got a really long document... and you've got pages... and you want to start the page numbering on something different. We're going to keep our start to 1. Very rarely will I change that. 'Primary Text Frame', we'll look at that in a later video. Columns, we haven't used this before. By default you have to have a minimum of 1. What we're going to have is 3 in this case. And the gutter is the space between these columns. Just leave it to whatever the default is. Let's have a quick look at why we use columns. So in here, I've done a little research for magazine spreads. What you'll notice is that... when people are designing magazines, professionals... they will start with the number of columns... and consistently use that throughout the magazine. It gives a bit of consistency through, say a really long document... so that you're not going to every page, switching out different columns. It's one of the things that are really easy to notice... when you're looking at amateurs do work, there's no consistency with columns. So, often it's 2, 3, 4, 5 columns. So we'll look at some of the examples. Now you can break these rules, kind of... but it adds a bit of consistency throughout. So let's look at, say this one here, it's an easy one. There's 3 columns. That's what we're going to be doing. And that is keeping to 3 columns. So let's have a look through, say this one here. This one's a little bit different, they're using 3 columns... but they're kind of breaking the rules a tiny bit... with the spreading across of these. So there's still 1, 2, 3... I know you're thinking like, "There's only 2 columns"... but you can see, this image here is actually spanning two of them. And they do the same thing over here, so there's still 3 columns... but this one here is spanning two of them. Let's have a look at some of the ones that... say this one here, I'd say is maybe an amateur work... because this just, I don't know... you can kind of see there’s no real columns in there. This is not even. It should be one, and then another one, and then, this one's a bit short. I don't know, I hope you can kind of see it, it feels like it's not. There's no consistency there, this one doesn't span the columns like it should. So it's got all the right ingredients for a great magazine... but I think columns can really help lift an amateur's work. This one here, 2 columns. This one here, still is, I think in the amateur category. It's cool, it's nice, but it's columns that I'm just unsure about. See this one here, it's beautiful, but crazy, but it's still using 4 columns. This big giant no. 2 spans two of them. That's okay, we're allowed to break the rules... but really breaking the rules within the rules, if you know what I mean. That was a long explanation, let's jump back into InDesign. So we're using 3 columns. Margins, we're going to use... something slightly bigger, so we're going to do '0.8 inches'. You'll notice that they changed all of them at the same time... because this little linking icon is set. I'm going to break that now, so I'm going to do all of them... except I want to do the bottom to be a little bigger, maybe 1.4" Now, if you're using millimeters... I'm using 20 all around, except the bottom, which I'm using 35 mms. Couple of things to know... often the bottom will be bigger than the rest of the document. Gives you a little bit of wiggle room down the bottom... to put things like page numbers and document titles. It also just gives a nice... even if you're not going to put page numbers down there... it gives the document a sort of grounding... gives it kind of a base at the bottom. So, it's just a visual footing. Not sure how to explain it... but it's nice with a nice thick bottom at the bottom. What you'll also notice, there's no left and right... there's inside and outside. So if I turn 'Facing Pages' off, can you see, it becomes... left and right, which we understand, but then, 'Facing Pages' on... it becomes inside and outside. That means, if I jump back to my example... you can see here, it just means-- look at this example here... you don't have a left and right essentially... but you have an inside margin, and an outside margin. And what you often can do is you can have a slightly bigger inside margin... if you've got something called Crepe, if you've got a really thick magazine... maybe these pages will disappear into that gap here, they call that Crepe. So you can kind of increase that. Our magazine's not big enough to worry about that. And often, as a designer, even if your magazine is really big... that is often the role of the printer... to start playing around with the Crepe, and adjusting that for you. Talk to them about it if you are worried about it... and often they'll help you out. 'Bleed', we're going to have of '0.125'... unless you're in millimeters, then it's 3mm. 'Slug' we never use, so we're going to click 'Create'. Let's jump to our pages panel. If you can't see it, let's go to 'Windows', 'Pages'... and just have a quick look at what we have done. We've got 8 pages. So our page 1 here, that's our cover, and then it moves to 'Spreads'. So I double click page 2, you can see here... I'm going to zoom out, 'Command -', or 'Control -' on a PC. You can see, they've put pages 2 and 3 together. You can have them separate, that's fine... but obviously when you're working on a magazine... it's handy to see them together, that's why we look at this word 'Spread'. We want to see them together. Great work, let's go inside of it, 'File', 'Save'. And let's put it into our 'Desktop', 'InDesign Class Files'. Let's call this one 'Green at Heart Newsletter'. 'V1' not 'Final'. All right, let's get on to the next video. Let's look at something called 'Master Pages', exciting. 28. How to use a Master Page in Adobe InDesign. : Hey, quickly before we get started in this video, Adobe InDesign has a had a small update that I'd like to explain. In a second, I'm going to start describing what is called a Master Page, or at least was. I've referred to it in this course as a Master Page. There's been a small text change. Old version, watch, new version, they're now called Parent pages. Whenever I say Master, what do I mean? I mean, Parent page. Master pages and now Parent pages. They do the exact same thing , they're just named differently. Now why has it changed? It's because, Adobe, well, I'll quote from them, "We have replaced non-inclusive language in Adobe InDesign to support cool Adobe values of diversity and inclusion." You will see, not only in InDesign, plus a bunch of other programs like Premier Pro, they used to be Master tracks then are called Source tracks. There is just a few little changes, especially around the word Master. When I say Master in this class, look for Parent. Is that clear? I hope it's clear. Let's get started. Good-looking people, what we're going do in this video is work on our Master pages. When we draw our rectangle, a pretty little box that our page numbers is going to go into. We do it once and it appears on all of our pages. Let's go and do that. To work on the Master page is we need to say this pages panel. I've got a window pages if you can't see it. Just have a little look at these pages here, I've got page 1, 2, 3, 4, but you can see the A in the corner. It means that they're attached to something called the A-Master, that's there by default, you are given one. You can have as many Master pages as you need, and you put things on the Master page that you want to appear on every page, like a page number, maybe it's a small title of the document, it's version or date or who produced it. Anything that you want to be consistent on every page, it might be some graphics or a logo or a watermark. To get to the Master page, you need to double-click up here. You might not be able to see it, so you might have to scroll down or find it. See if you can see it hiding up in the top of the pages panel. To get to it, you just double-click it, and you got to make sure you're there. To make sure, it's not very obvious, I wish there was like a big flashing green light that said you were in here. But down the bottom here it says A-Master, I'm not on one page or two or three, I'm on A-Master. I've zoomed out a little bit just so I can see it all. Maybe not that far. Let's go to the rectangle tool and let's at the top here, give it a fill of magenta is fine, and just draw a big rectangle on this left-hand side. What you'll notice is, can you see here, that rectangle has appeared on all the left-hand spreads. On the right-hand ones I'm drawing nothing on this side because you'll have things like page numbering on different sides of the pages, or you only want the document name in the top right, but you don't need it on the right of this page. You have left and right spread. Do the same thing over here, draw a different style of a box, maybe a different color. Just so that you can see, something a bit more obvious. You can see over here that when I draw stuff on the Master page, it appears on all of my pages. You'll notice if I go to these pages, double-click on page 1, grab my black arrow, is I can't actually select it. If I need to delete it, it needs to come off the Master page. Let's jump back to our Master page, double-click it and select you, and select you, and delete it. What I'd like to do is grab the rectangle tool and I'd like to draw a rectangle that sits down the bottom. We're going to be doing, you saw it at the beginning there, a box that sits on the bottom. I want to make sure it overlaps the bleep, so it's gets trimmed off from the button, and it goes right up until the spine here. How far up? Just have a guess, you can change it later on, and you'll notice on page 1, there it is they double-click. Page 2, I've got that nice colored box will duplicate it for the other side in a sec. Actually, make sure you go back to my A-Master. I promise you, you'll be like the world's best user of InDesign and you will still forget you're not on the Master page. Spin age is designing something on page 1 thinking it's on the Master page, and have to copy and paste it afterwards. We always forget. Same happens when you think you're designing on page 1 and you're actually in the Master page and you realize everything you've designed is on every single page You just have to do some copying and pasting afterwards. Next thing I want to do is I want to fill this with one of our colors. What you can do when you get started with the new document is you'll see at the top here there's actually none of those colors through yet. They're sitting over there, which is no big drama. But you can be all official and bring this swatches through properly. With the black arrow, have nothing selected. Right-click this guy and say, Add to Swatches and just do it for all of them, so you know, you've got all of our colors as part of the swatches thing. There he is there. It's a bit weird, they are there, but why aren't they there. It's because this is new and there is not a super slick integration yet. That will change. If I have this selected and at the top here, I'm going to pick my GaH Red. You'll see it pays on all the right-hand spreads. Now I'm going to select it, copy, and paste it. Hit a Copy, hit a Paste, and we're going to have a left-hand spread as well. Let's double check it's on all other pages. Double-click page A, page 2, page 3 is all a little foot out colored box. The next thing that we're going do is do our automatic page numbering. Will do that in the next video, skip to that. One of the things I want to explain before we move on though is, Master Pages control all of these pages, and so when it comes to things like adjusting the margins and columns, it's best to do it in the A-Master because it'll adjust all the pages. Say you go to page 1 and I'm like, Oh, I want to change the columns to four. I go up to Layout and go to Margins and I just pick. Columns are now going to be four. Click Okay. What happens is page 1 changed, you can see page 2 and 3 are still the same. That's how to change individual pages. But probably more often than not, you just want to actually change them all. You've decided you want to change everything. You do that by going A-Master. Double-click it and make the changes in here. Now if I go to object, keep going to object, and this layout margins, and go to four. You'll see it does this page. You have the drop here, and double-click this page, make it go blue, and do it for this side as well. Fiddly, I know, but that's the way it is. Let's go to four. Now, what you'll notice is if I've go to page 1, page 2, page 3, I've done those adjustments. If you're finding it's a little bit weird, it's probably because you're not doing it on your Master page. I'm going to undo that. Let's go and do automatic page numbering in the next video. 29. How do I add automatic page numbering to a InDesign file. : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at automatic page numbering... where we can jump to any page... and it automatically knows what page... we don't have to manually type it in. We're going to use the automatic page numbering feature, and the Master Pages. Let's go and do that. First up, we need to make sure we're on our A-Master. So we want to do it once, and it appears on all the pages. So double click any of these two 'spreads'. And I'm going to zoom in. And just double check that you can see down here, it says A-Master. If not, just keeping hitting this, double click until you get in there. What we'll do is we'll start with the bottom right. I'm going to zoom in a little bit. We're going to grab the 'Type' tool. We're going to draw a 'Type' box anywhere in this white area. Because there's nothing here, it's a bit safe to be drawing on the white now. Let's type in 'Page'. 'Space'. And I'm going to now put in automatic page numbering. So we're going to go up to 'Type', 'Insert Special Character'. There's one in here called 'Markers'. And then it's called 'Current Page Number' in a horrible shortcut. Not sure why they decide-- that's the one they use all the time. So we're going to use this. You have to use your two hands and your nose to get that one to work. It says 'Page A', which is a bit weird, and I'm, "Hmm, that's not page 1'. It's because we're on our A- Master. It means that I'm on this A-Master, but if I jump to page 1, look, double click. Hey, I'm on page 1. Double click page 3, I'm on page 3. So that's the automatic page numbering. It puts in A because I'm on my A-Master, but it will adjust for every page. So let's go back to A-Master, and let's style it a tiny bit. I'm going to select the text. Now, 12 is the default font size, it's too big. 10 point is a nice, good body copy size for page numbers. In terms of the font, I'm just going to put in Arial... we'll look at fancier fonts later on. Arial Bold. And I'm going to make it white, so I have the text selected. Let's go up here, and I'm going to pick 'Paper'. What I also might do is, I'll grab my 'Black Arrow', it's gone. Click anywhere in the center. It's a little hard when you've got nothing to click on. I'm just clicking anywhere in the center of this box. Here he is. And what I'll do is, highlight the text again... and I'm going to get it to go to 'Paragraph'. And I'm going to get it to 'right align'. Just means that when I get up to double digits, maybe 10... it will start pushing away from the side, that way. Let's align it up with the margin there. Now if yours is not aligning up, go to 'View'... 'Extras', no, this one here, 'Grids & Guides'. 'Smart Guides' is turned off, I have no idea why. It's been on for the rest of the course. I must have accidentally bumped that shortcut... but it doesn't, you'll see smart guides. Smart Guides are amazing. There's these little lines that appear, now it aligns perfectly. So down here, aligning up nicely. You can use your arrow keys just to push it down a bit further. And there's my page A. What I want to do is copy it. Say I've used 'Command C'. On this page, I'm going to do 'Command V'. And I'm going to put it over here. I'm going to get it to align up, but what I'd like to do is highlight text. Is it aligning up across spreads? Probably not, it does... do it by accident, you can see, the lines kind of dragging out... zoom right out, and those green lines kind of try to align it up. And it does work. Most of the time it works, but it's a little bit hard to do, I guess. So I'm going to click both of these, and align them. To select more than one object, 'Black Arrow', click on this box once. Hold 'Shift', click on this box. I'll zoom in a little bit. And at the top here, I've got a little shortcut version there... but you can go to 'Window', 'Object', 'Align'. And let's just get them to align. Double check. Nice. So let's double check, page 1... page 2, it says page 2, page 3, it says page 3. And that my friends is automatic page numbering. Let's get on to the next video. 30. Removing a masterpage & deleting parts off the master page in InDesign.: In this video we're going to have page 1... where it's got no 'Master Page' applied... even though the rest of the pages have master pages. So we're going to insert a blank page. And we're also going to look at... you can see, this still has the 'A Master' applied... but it doesn't have the page number, I've just selectively deleted this. Or in this case I could go and change this color of this box. And it's still part of the 'A Master'. So let's go and learn how to do this. So there's two ways we can do this... and it depends on your requirements. This first page, I want to completely remove the 'A Master'. I just want it to be a blank page with nothing on it. What we can do is, you can select on page 1... right click, and go to the one that says 'Apply Master to Page', click on that. And what we can say is, 'To Pages' '1', I'm going to say 'none', please. Click 'OK', and if I double click page 1 now... it's got none of that 'Master Page' stuff on it. And that's going to be great for our cover page. The other way you might implement this... is that you want to just delete certain parts of the 'Master Page'. So let's say page 2, I double clicked on it. We want to remove the page number, but we like this colored bar here. So what we can do, there's two ways of doing this. You can right click it, and there's one that says... 'Override All Master Page Items', click on this. It's still got the 'A Master' applied. So if I add something to the 'Master Page' now... it will still receive it... but you can see, these objects are actually click-able. And I can say, actually I just want to get rid of the page number. So, this side here, because I haven't done it... you can see, I can't select it, or remove it, so this one here... it's still part of the 'A Master'... but these objects are actually kind of yanked out. So I can start manipulating... I can change the color of them, I could do some stuff to them. It depends on what you want to do. Another cool little trick that I use mostly is... say I want to do the exact same thing to page 4... is I hold down 'Command' and 'Shift' on a Mac... or 'Control' and 'Shift' on a PC, and give it a click. That is like a manual way of doing that thing we just did... with the 'Override All Master Page Items'. Don't know why that's a shortcut. They make the weirdest shortcuts here in InDesign. Who does that, and remembers that? Maybe I do. So, there's two ways. You can right click the page, and say, I want to apply 'None' to that page... or you can do this 'Override All Master Page Items'... and it just pulls them off, and you can individually decide what to delete. 31. Production Video 1: Hi there, welcome to our first production video. What's a production video? It's where we're not actually learning anything new... we just need to get some stuff done. We'll do a little tips and tricks as we make stuff... but you can skip this video if you like. We're going to go through and actually just put together... this cover for our newsletter before we move on. Let's go and do it. So let's do the cover page, double click page 1... double check down here you're on page 1. I'll zoom out. And you can see the edges, especially when you're working with a full page. I'm just kind of scrolling around with these guys. I'm actually using a little shortcut, if you hold down 'space bar'... you'll see, your cursor turns into a little hand... and I can click, hold, and drag, I use that quite a bit. I've zoomed out so I can see the edges easily. And I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place', 'Command D', or 'Control D' on a PC. I'm going to bring in 'Garden Center', so make sure you're in... your 'Exercise Files', in '03 Newsletter'. And make sure you're working with 'Garden Center', click 'Open'. You can click once, or you can click and drag. I'm going to click and drag across, to try and get it all in there. It's a little bit big for it, but it's okay. Remember, 'W' kind of shows you it trimmed up. So it's a nice bit of 'Bleed' there, it's going to go in the bin. So it's going to have a nice edge. Great. Now we're going to bring in our logo, go to 'File', 'Place'. And we'll bring in the 'Black' one, and click 'Open'. And I'm going to click once over here. Make it a little bit bigger, maybe, about this sort of size. And stick it in even bigger. Remember, holding down 'Command' and 'Shift' to do the resizing. And it's going to go in the middle. You've seen the green line appeared to show it's in the middle. You can get it to align perfectly in the middle... by opening up 'Window', 'Object', 'Align'. What you can do-- by default it's going to 'Align to Selection'... which means it's going to-- If you've got one thing selected, nothing's going to happen. It's when you have two things selected... it's going to align to those two selected things. Doesn't make much sense. What makes sense is I'm going to 'Align to Page'. Switch that out. So now when I hit 'center'... it's going to align to the page behind it. Say if I did this side, it's going to align to the page. That only happens if you got that selected. And that could be a pain. Next time you're trying to do it, you're trying to just align two things... like we did for the footer numbers, the page numbers... so you might have to go back to 'Selection' afterwards. We're going to leave it at 'Selection', and move him up. Awesome. Before we go, we're going to go and switch this out for the white one. You're like, "We just put the black one in." I know, it's more of an example. I want you to get used to be able to use this 'Links' panel. Have this selected, you don't have to actually. Make sure this is selected over here, 'Logo Green'. And go to this one that says 'Relink'. And switch it out for the white version. Hey, practice. We're practicing. Alright, production video over, let's go and talk about Image Resolution. 32. What is Effective PPI & Image resolution in the InDesign links panel. : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at what image resolution is... or DPI, PPI, effective PPI. Basically it comes down to the quality of your images. Let's go and do that. So image resolution might have come up in your world before... and you might be like, "Ugh, I can't understand, or maybe I don't." Maybe you've never heard of it. So, let's have a quick little look at what it is. Resolution is basically the quality of an image. I'm going to click on this background image here. I'm going to go to my 'Links' panel. If you can't see 'Links', go to 'Window', 'Links'. What we're going to do is, you might be able to see it already... but I don't have mine activated. See this little arrow here, it says 'Show/Hide Link Information'. I'm going to make mine go up a little bit higher... just so I can see a bit more of this link information. You can twirl it down, make it bigger. It just gives you information about the image. So there's the name, it's a JPEG, it's on page 1, it's RGB. What we're really looking for is this one, the major one, the 'Effective PPI'. PPI is an acronym for Pixels Per Inch. If you've ever heard of DPI, or Dots Per Inch, it's exactly the same thing. Just a new way of explaining it, pixels instead of dots. And we've got targets to hit. So the effective PPI, maximum, should be about 300. That's going to give you... amazingly beautiful, crisp, clear image when we print it. And the lowest that we can go is variable. So, it comes down to what it's purpose is. If this is going to be printed commercially... through an offset printer... and then put out in our display case at our showroom... then we want it to be as close to 300, or above. You can even have 1200, and that's fine, there's nothing wrong with that. Above is good, below is where it starts getting into the gray area. So 300 is the target, it's totally just a made up number... that looks really good. Some people use it like... some sort of carved in stone, can never be changed number... but really, if you're close to 300... like this one here, it's 291, I would not care. It is probably pre-press people that they might-- I'll be going to a red kind of color now... but if we were honest, we've all printed stuff below quality... and nobody's noticed the difference. So, it's how low can you go? And what really happens is... it's depending on how big you stretch this image. This image, you can see, it's actual PPI is 300. So here is a 300 DPI image, or PPI image. Now I just stretch it a little bit bigger to cover the 'Bleed'. So I made it just a teensy bit bigger, so it reached over this 'Bleed' here. So, let's look at an example that won't work. I'm going to delete this guy in the background temporarily. I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place'. And I've got an example in '03 Newsletter', grab that one. And let's go to 'Image Resolution Example'. I'm going to bring it through, and I'm going to... bring it in, I've just clicked it once and that's come in. And it says it is 72. So, if going to a commercial printer, it's not going to work. It needs to be at least 300. But it looks okay on screen, so if it were going out to a screen... as in, it's going to be emailed, or downloadable from your website... 72 is just a fine size. I'd like it to be a little bit higher... but the minimum is 72 to look okay on most screens. On a retina screen, like this MacBook Pro I've got in front of me... it will look a little bit pants, but-- I got to stop using the word pants, it's UK slang for bad. They're kind of pants, not bad, anyway. Back to resolution. So it is 72 Dots Per Inch, or PPI, Pixels Per Inch. So it's going to work for screens, but it's not going to work for print. But let's just say, "Let's just make it bigger." I want to use it for the whole cover, so I'm going to make it quite big. I'm going to make it nice and big, so it covers the 'Bleed'. I'm going to trim that up there. It's looking okay, right? It's like-- Looks kind of fine on my screen now, might look okay on your video... but it will print really badly. You can see, if I select on it, the effective PPI is 30 now. Why is it changing? It's because I'm scaling it out. Watch the effective PPI as I keep scaling it up. Scale it up, there it goes, 28. It's kind of stretching those little pixels if we zoom right in. It's actually made up of little squares. That's what resolution is, or Pixels Per Inch. These are the pixels, and how many pixels are in an inch? At the moment there's only 28 in an inch. You need a lot more dense pixels for this to work. I'm going to zoom out. You can start to see now, it's looking a bit red around the outside, pants even. So the main thing to look at-- Don't worry about the quality of the image that came in first. Back in the days of yore... you had to make sure everything was 300 PPI before it came in. What you can do now is, you're just looking at effective PPI. Ignore this number here, whatever is here. So if this is going out to commercial print, this is so far from 300. That is not going to work at all. Now, what are the boundaries? Say I do want to use this commercially, I'm going to scale it down. You can see, it's still too little. So if I want to use this in commercial print... and I want to use it at 300 PPI... you can see, I'm going there, 138. Might as well move it across so you can see it closer. Getting smaller. 227. 312, close to it. So that now is the right resolution to be printed. Unfortunately, it's teeny tiny. So if you're downloading images from the internet... you've got to make sure they're really big. So at least when you scale them down, you get close to 300. How low can you go? Now this is total personal preference. Now the rule is 300, but I know if it's a good quality image... from a stock library site, you can get down to about 180. 150, if you're really sneaky, and it will print fine. I probably wouldn't do this for the front cover... because it's such an important part of this document... but say it's an image on page 2, and it's just a small image... and the resolution is about 180, nobody will notice. Again, it really depends. If you're trying to sell Bentleys... and you've got some low quality images that are just slightly off... I'd be looking for 300 and above for resolution. But in the true day-to-day world, 180 works just fine for me. And to recap, if you're working on screens... that means it's going out via digital means... it's going to be emailed, or downloaded from a website... 72 is the minimum. A lot different, because screens deal with resolution... a whole lot better than when it's printed physically. So if that's the case, I can have this all the way up at... 54, not quite there, but... we're getting close, 59. Come on, Dan, you can do it. Okay, 71, 72, that is fine... if it's a physical size, it's going to be a digital download. So in summary, just make sure your effective PPI is between 72 and 300, depending on it's purpose. 33. How to add drop shadows to an image or logo in InDesign: In this video we're going to look at special effects in InDesign. There's not many of them in InDesign, it's more of a Photoshop job... but there's some basic stuff here in InDesign. The main one that I use is 'Drop Shadow'... and it's really handy for say this logo. It's against our kind of mortal background. We can turn 'Drop Shadow', and watch this, turn it off. Easy enough to read, but it's even easier... to read with the 'Drop Shadow' on it. So we're going to show you how to do that. Let's go and do it. First thing we need to do is, we're going to select on this logo here. Not the center of it... just with the 'Black Arrow' click anywhere, but your 'Content Grabber'. And let's go up to 'Objects', down to 'Effects'. And here are our effects. We're going to start with 'Drop Shadow'. I'm going to move mine just over a little bit. You notice, 'Preview' was on by default for mine, you have to turn yours on. And you see, there's a Drop Shadow. On, off, on, off. When it comes to the Drop Shadow... the opacity is important, it's how dark it is. You can see, I can lighten it up, darken it up. 75% is, I don't know why, always the best one. 'Distance' is how far away it is, you can click up. You can see, it's moving further and further away. '0.5', maybe even lower. What was it on by default? I can't remember, something like that. 'Offset' is exactly like distance... except that you can control the up and the down... this one does left and right, or X and Y at the same time... so you can say, actually I just want it to go up that way. So I'm going to put that one back to what that one was. The 'Angle' is which way the Sun's hitting, and casting the shadow. You can see, here, 'Angle' at 135, it's coming down from this angle. You can say, drag this little guy around. And it's now coming up from the bottom of this. I find top, left, or straight up and down is the key. I'm going to use 90 for straight up and down for my one. 'Size' is how fuzzy the edges are, watch this, if I make it really big... it's getting big and broad, it's a little bit hard to see, I guess... so I'm going to move it out. Let's click 'OK', and drag it out here, so you can see it a bit more. You can see the size now is kind of a big, broad option. To get back into it, like I have... if I've closed it down, you can go back to 'Object', 'Effects'. And click on 'Drop Shadow' again. So that's the size, so if I move the size down... it gets sharper, and sharper... until it's more of a hue around the outside, it's up to you. We don't use 'Spread', we don't use 'Noise'... you can play around with them, it looks a little lame. Now, for me, I only ever use the 'Drop Shadow'. There are other ones, I just don't find a purpose for them. So, let's have a little look at them, so I'm going to untick 'Drop Shadow'... and tick 'Inner Shadow'. It puts like a shadow inside the logo, it's kind of cool. I don't really use it very much. I'll go untick that, click on 'Outer Glow'. And it's got kind of a halo effect around the outside, kind of cool. One thing you'll notice is that I've turned this on and off... and you'll see that these, I can't change it. It's because I've still selected 'Blue' here. I've still got 'Drop Shadow' selected, but I'm turning this on and off... you can do that separately, so click on 'Outer Glow'... then I can go to this and say, actually I want to make my size bigger... and it gets a bigger halo effect. 'Inner Glow', let's turn that one off, that one on. Just going around the outside... it's a little hard to see because it's a white logo. "Bevel and Emboss', you can make it look kind of 3Dish. Not my favorite, but that's alright, you might love it. 'Satin', I don't even know what that does, like 'Bevel and Emboss'... but kind of more like a pillow. 'Basic Feather'... 'Directional Feather', all of these, you can have a play around with them. I don't use them, you might love them... but it's bit of an experimentation, no one that uses 'Drop Shadow' a lot... mainly because, exact same instance we've got here... is that this white logo is against the background... and it's maybe just not as clear as we'd like it to be. So we want to finally lift it off and push it. So we get the white text against the mortal background. And if you want to go further and do some more exciting things... you want to turn into a neon sign doing cool stuff. That will be the job of Photoshop... so what you do is open up this logo in Photoshop... and that is the tool to do more special effects. This just has the real basics here in InDesign... Photoshop will be the one for the more exciting ones. 34. What is TypeKit used for in Adobe InDesign?: So let's work with some new fonts. I'm going down to page 3, go and grab the 'Type Tool'. Draw a nice big box in the center here. And we're going to call this one 'Healing Herbs'. Then I select it... and at the top here, I'm going to go to 'Character'... and you'll drop this down... and you'll see, there's a bunch of fonts on your system. These are the ones that come by default on your machine. We're going to look at adding fonts from Typekit, and some other free stuff. Let's quickly look at free fonts, and then jump into Typekit. There are lots of places to get free fonts. 1001 Free Fonts, DaFont, I find... there are lots of tacky fonts, and crappy fonts in there. So I just jump to Font Squirrel. It's a great place for commercial use fonts... that are free, you can go through here, and download them. Say this 'Alex Brush' here, I'm going to click download. I'm going to stick it on my 'Desktop', in my 'Class Files'. Click 'Save'. I'm going to open up that little zip file that it came with. Double click it, and it's given me this. The TTF files, the True Type Fonts, what you want. It might be an OTF file, or-- Can't remember what that ones are, but double click it. And depending on your system... it will come up with 'Install Font', super easy. Both Mac, and PC. Now, if I jump into InDesign, no need to restart. I can go up here, and say 'Alex'. There it is, 'Alex Brush'. And I can start using that font... I'm going to make it a lot bigger, maybe up to 40. And there's that font, commercial use, ready to go. Now, Font Squirrel and Free Fonts site, like it. They often have really good heading fonts, but very poor body copy fonts. That's because body copy fonts just take a lot longer to make... because there's so many more nuances than just these big headings here. In an earlier video, we looked at MyFonts... where you can buy commercial fonts... but we're going to look at Typekit... because Typekit is an actual paid for, commercial font library from Adobe... but because you've got a Creative Cloud license, or potentially you have... you get access to it for free... or at least as part of your subscription... so let's go and check that out. Up the top here... the easiest way is to click this one that says 'Add Fonts from Typekit'. And it's going to actually open up a web browser. You can't do it from within InDesign. Let's go. So it's opening up here in my browser. If you are not logged in.. you might have to log in with your Adobe user name and password. Mine's already logged in. I love this site, you can do some cool things. I'm going to go to this one that says 'My Library'. Actually let's go to 'All Families'. And 'Sample Text' thing is quite useful. So, say I want to do 'Healing Herbs'... you can kind of see what it's going to look like before you download it... which is really handy. Play around with the size. So it's going to be something like that. And you can start working through the fonts. A nice thing about Typekit as well, is over here, this classification. Now, all the fonts on my machine-- I've got hundreds of them... but they're all not grouped... so it's a bit of a pain to go through... and say I want to find a hand drawn font. So it's easy to come to Typekit, click on 'Hand'... and you're going to find hand drawn fonts. And you can download them from here. Let's go to-- You can see, this one here, 'Slab Serif', nice, big, thick chunky one. You can also add extra little filters as well. You can say I want it for headings only. So it's going to kind of cut up to things mainly for paragraph text. Down here is quite useful as well. Say you have really long headings... you can pick this width to be quite skinny... so you can fit quite a lot of letters in a title. Or if you want a nice big, thick wide one... click on it again, and it just deselects all of them. If you want heavy weight, or a nice thin weight... contrast, it's height... there is all sorts of things. This one is quite useful, if you're picking up body copy font forever... for a company... I hate it when you get stuck with... you get the font, but the numbers do this weird thing... where they-- can you see down here, they all sit on the base line... which means this 4 dangles below, and the 6 is above. I want a font that also has all the numbers lining up. So it will not give me any issues later on. I'm going to deselect that. Actually I've got some fonts we want to use. So I'm going to go in here, and up here, I'm going to search 'Typekit'. Let's download a couple of fonts for me. The first one I want is called 'Lust'. You can choose 'Lust' or 'Lust Script'... with that more curly one, I'm going to use just the plain 'Lust'. Click on it, and there's an option here that says 'Sync All'. Click on that. Kick back, relax. And the nice thing about this is that... actually Adobe is Creative Cloud's app. It's actually installing this for you. I'm going to click 'Close'. Now if we jump in to InDesign... and highlight the text, super simple. Lust. Here it is, I'm going to use 'Lust Italic'. I'm going to give it the mid green color. That's how you install fonts. We're going to go through now, and install a couple more. We're going to use 'Roboto'. I like Roboto. Now when you are picking fonts... often you'll use header fonts, something a little bit more exciting, like Lust. And then a body copy font. Obviously, Lust as a body copy font would be a terrible idea. So Roboto, great. I'm going to sync Roboto. I like Roboto because it is like Arial. Nice, simple, easy to read font... but it's a little more sophisticated, I feel. And let's look at Roboto Slab. It's very similar. It's got these, what's called Slab Serifs. See this bottom of this q here, Serifs have little feet. So this is a Serif font, it's got the little feet down the bottom. Sans Serif, if you've ever heard that word... means without the little feet. So, Sans is without Serifs. And a Slab Serif just means a big, chunky, slabby one. Like old school university fonts. Now I already have this one synced so I don't have to click 'Sync All' again. It's all ready to go. As a little side note... Roboto is what Google uses for YouTube, or YouTube uses for YouTube. It's their font that they use for everything. It's quite a nice font, they use it well. Go and check out on how they use it... if you want to find combinations of Roboto being used nicely. Now, one thing when it comes to using fonts... if you are really new, often some basic rules can help you. And the basic rules are, you pick two fonts... you pick a font that is a Serif font... and a Sans Serif font; A Sans Serif. These little things hanging off the edges here... like little feet, are called Serif. So you have a Serif font, that have these... and a Sans Serif font, is without them. Sans is Latin for without. Often that's a great way to get started. So just pick two fonts, I know we're picked three in this case. I've got some special use cases for it. But pick two fonts, one Serif, one Sans Serif. If you pick two Serif fonts... often, you can pick something like Times or Garamond together... they're not different enough to look different. They just look a bit messy or broken. So, you pick one with the feet, and without the feet... often, it doesn't really matter... which one you use for the title, or the body copy... but the combination can look quite good. And from within those fonts, you can pick two weights. So you've got kind of four uses. You've got your Serif font, Sans Serif font, and within those you can pick... a light version, and a bold version. Or maybe just a regular version, and a bold version. So you got kind of four choices... and they'll give you enough options... to keep consistency through the document... without using too many fonts... but also be able to break up content. Things like headings versus sub-headings versus body copy... versus paragraphs... versus captions, those types of things. Now if you're still unsure how to put things together, which two to pick... you can just go into Google, and search for Typekit. And something like font combinations. Font pairings is another good word. And go to Images. And what it will do is... it will show you Typekit fonts that can be used together. Are all of them great? No. But you go through, and you say, actually-- I wish this was actually bigger... so I can see it a bit better. But let's say this one here... this seems like a really good example of a Serif font for the title. And a Sans Serif for the body copy. So follow this link, figure out what they are... and you can download those ones. You can also see down here, this is the same font... but with different weights. Those are good examples to show you... we're not switching our fonts... we're just playing with two different weights. So that's using Adobe Typekit in InDesign. 35. How to add the Copyright, Registered & Trademark symbols in InDesign: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at doing this. When we zoom in, you can see this copyright symbol. It's the same principle for registered, or trademark... or any of the other symbols that you might not find on your keyboard. Say that you've got a $ sign on your keyboard... but you need £s, €s, or some other symbol. They're called Glyphs, and we're going to go and do those now. So to add a Glyph, let's grab our 'Type Tool'. We're going to put ours on... actually we'll put it over here... and we'll move it to this page when we're finished. We need to draw out a 'Type Box'. This one's going to be 'Copyright'. And this has come from 'Adobe Stock'. We'll go to '2019', and now we want to put in... the copyright symbol. So we're going up to 'Type', down to 'Glyphs'. Glyphs is the word we use for... the parts of the font that's probably not on your keyboard. So, look down the keyboard, there's no copyright button... there's an & button, and the $ sign... but no copyright. And what we're going to do actually is select this type first. We're going to use 'Roboto' for most of our body copy. And we'll use Roboto... There's lots of Robotos in here, I'm going to use 'Medium'. You might be using 'Regular'. I'm going to use 'Roboto Regular'. And now I want to put in the copyright symbol. So let's have our cursor flashing just after the 9. Find copyright in here, and we're going to double click it. There's registered trademark, there's copyright. It can be a little tough to find. You can play around with the size of this. To see if you can find them, just scroll through until you find it. I had it, I've lost it, there it is, just double click it. And you can see, it appears over here. It's the same for all of these symbols. If you find you don't have a copyright symbol... it's probably because you're using a font... that doesn't have any of this extra Glyph data. Say we use that free font, up here, it's called Alex Brush. Can you see, Alex Brush, it does have a copyright symbol. That's more by luck, me picking up a font that has it. Often some of those free fonts, that's what they'll do. They'll do the upper and lower case, and some of the numbers... but they'll just ignore copyright and all those other things. So that's the reason they're free. But this case, both of these have it. So that is the Glyphs panel. I'm going to close this down now. Next is kind of more of production. I'm going to go through and bring in an image. So, not only Glyph stuff anymore, we're going to build up a page here... that you saw at the beginning of the video. So let's just go 'File', 'Place'. Bring in 'Herbs'. How big is it going to be? We're going to have to play around with this because it's a weird format. I'm just going to drag it out, this sort of size. I'm going to zoom out quite a bit. Especially if you're doing full background images... you're going to have to zoom out so you can see the whole thing. 'Command Shift' on a Mac, 'Control Shift' on a PC to scale it. While it scales, it at least goes over the 'Bleed'. And then I'm going to tuck it in with my 'Black Arrow', to the center there. Zoom in a little bit more. Grab the corners, get them to the 'Bleed'. Now, if I left it like this, it's hanging over the 'Bleed' quite a bit... it doesn't matter, it will get trimmed off when it goes out to PDF. So it doesn't matter, this is just, mainly a bit of designer OCD. Just to make sure it all aligns up, and looks nice in InDesign. Changes nothing of the final output. What I might do in here is use the 'Content Grabber'. Now, at the beginning of this course I said I don't like 'Content Grabber'. I'm using it in this class because-- I just am. What I tend to do is just double click the image anywhere. And it does the same thing. It jumps to the content without this target here, 'Content Grabber'. Maybe because of this course... I am getting a little bit more used to the 'Content Grabber'. So I might have to eat my words and say... it's actually not as bad as I thought it was. Now I'm just messing about, let's move on. What I want to do is grab my 'Rectangle Tool'. I'm going to give it a 'Fill' of my 'Green'. We'll use 'Dark Green'. And I'm going to give it a 'Stroke' of 'None'. And the draw box, I'll draw it over here. Grab my 'Black Arrow', and move it in. I find that often it is more helpful. I'm going to hit the W key just to see where the edges are. Somehow it's a little hard to see. How big does it need to be? Big enough to hold this. What size is this? One of the things is that-- remember, we have to play with the 'Arrange'... because this guy is behind all of this. So I'm going to right click it before I move it across. So you might have to go to 'undo'. Go to 'Arrange', and go to 'Bring to Front'. Brings it in front of everything. You there, select the 'Type', I'm going to make mine 'White'. It's up here, 'Paper'. What size is it? 12 is too big, so I'm going to turn it down to 10. Note that 10 is a very common body copy size, 12 is a bit big. And what am I doing? I'm just messing about now. Skip on to the next video, while I mess about. Beautiful. Now I'm going to skip off to the next video. I'll see you there. 36. Where can I find the different versions of letters in InDesign - Ligatures.: Have you ever seen some fonts, and you're like... "How did they make it look so pretty?" You can see, that's the one we worked at in the last example. And these little extra fonts are called Ligatures. And a part of the font are hidden away. You can see this one here, like this Y, that's the default Y... but look at the varieties of Ys you get to pick from. Same with this ampersand, '&' here. All sorts of different versions... to help you pick the one that's perfect for your situation. So let's go and do that, and look at something called Ligatures. So Ligatures, although they're kind of different from Glyphs... they're actually found in the exact same place. Let's zoom in on 'Healing Herbs'. And what we want to do is... we want to see if there's any kind of more special Hs. Say, this H is nice, but we want to fancy it up a little bit. So, with it selected, go to 'Type', 'Glyphs'. What will happen is, if you got a letter selected, you can see in here... it's giving you other options for that H. I'm going to make them a lot bigger so we can see. This one here, you can see there's kind of three versions of it. So there's this version, then I click on this version... and you double click on it, you see it replaced it with a swishy fancy version. Do I like it more? What's the difference between these two? I can't see the difference. Hold down this one, there's only actually two options. So we fancied up this one, maybe this S, is there anything for the S? You highlight them and hope for the best. This one here has a slightly different version. This one here, you can see... a spiky version. Now there'll be some letters... that are just more prone to having swishy extra bits. You can start to see down here, let's have a look. I'm going to make a new text box. Just for an example. So I'm going to type in Y, and a lower case y... and you see, if I highlight y... it has this version, I'm just double clicking just to see... but you can see, y in this case, there are so many versions. It is lots of words... and it's got a nice shape to do these types of flourishes... and they're called Ligatures. It's just, somebody designs the font, and then goes through and goes... "What about it if it was like this, and like this?" It allows you to do some extra bits and pieces. I find this quite useful. I don't know why, but ampersand is one of those letters... that you end up using quite a lot. Ampersand is that, '&'. But you'll notice in here, there's some really cool ampersands. There's that one, there's that one. Double click it, there's that one, double click, that one there. They're the same font, but a very different look, and feels for them. So if you're doing an invite and-- I feel like I've done about a zillion wedding invites in my design career... and it's always like, "Dan & Katie invite you to their wedding"... and it's always the ampersand you spend the most time... doing a big ingredient for the design. If you look in here though... and let's say we pick a font that isn't as exciting... so I'm going to copy and paste this one. I'm going to go there, and I'm going to pick-- Say your company uses 'Times New Roman'... so I'm going to pick 'Times Regular'. 'Healing Herbs', I'm going to highlight the H. And, there's no Ligatures. So you might just find that-- especially with the free font... there's going to be no Ligatures... and if it's just a real plain font... they haven't gone through and done a swishy looking H. All right, my friends, that is looking at Ligatures. I'm going to go through and tidy this up. You can skip on to the next one. So we need you, we need you... I don't really like the little wiggly bit there. Do I like it? I'm not sure. Let's go into the next video, anyway. I'll see you over there. 37. How to add placeholder text & lorem ipsum & get a word count in InDesign: In this video we’re going to look at how to bring in Lorem Ipsum... or this place holder text... which is super useful when you don't have the copy yet... but you still need to work on the design. So let's go and do that. First thing to get Lorem Ipsum is that-- I'm going to actually push this out of the way. Place holder text is what it's called in InDesign... most people call it Lorem Ipsum. I'm going to grab the 'Type' tool. I'm going to draw a 'Type Box' that goes from this margin... all the way to this margin. And it's kind of half the page. And I'm going to go up to 'Type', 'Fill with Placeholder Text'. That my friends, is how you insert this kind of mixed up Latin words. They are actual Latin words, but they are jumbled up. From a distance they look like proper language. And why do we use them in design? It's mainly because you probably don't have the text yet. You needed something in there to start picking fonts and styles. So often when I'm starting a project, at that very same time... I copy and write all of this before starting a project... as I don't have the text yet. So I need to start styling it, and I'll switch it out later on. The other times I'll do it... is when I am , say, I'm pitching a design to a client, and it's a concept... and I don't want them getting into the minutiae of doing copy changes. Say I just go and pick some random texts from their websites. I'll end up with meetings, and instead of them talking about the design... and what they like about that... they end up picking holes in the type. They say, "Oh, you can't write that in there, or Latin there." It's hard to say, "Don't worry about the type... or the text and its content," it's just the style that we're looking at. So often Lorem Ipsum is the way to go to get started. Though I've had on many occasions people email me saying... "I don't speak Latin." or that it's broken, and the fonts aren't loading, something's happening. You might want to just explain that you've used mixed up Latin... when you send the concepts, especially if it's going over by email. Say you've designed it, and the copy writing is happening afterwards... what you can do is work out what the word count is. So check the work count, you have your cursor flashing... 'Type Tool', cursor flashing in here anywhere, go to 'Window'... and go to 'Info'. And that should, after a second, tell you this is 347 words. So if you know 300 words can come in, you can delete a few... and get it down to 300... or you can reach out to the copywriter, and say... you need to be writing to these numbers... or you need to write 347, roughly. Which you can do if you've been told how many numbers. Instead of trying to delete and add to try and get this word count... lot of people will just jump out to a website called lipsum.com lipsum.com is an ugly site... but it's really usable, people use this one all the time. If you're a designer, click on 'Words', say I need 500 words. And I'm going to click 'Generate Lorem Ipsum'. And that is exactly 500 words that I could use. I can copy and paste that into InDesign. Back to InDesign. So let's leave it there... and in the next videos we'll look at getting this into columns... and bringing in text from say, Word documents. All right, bye bye. 38. Importing Text from Microsoft Word & keeping or removing the formatting : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at bringing in text into InDesign... and look at some special features... when we're bringing in from something like Microsoft Word... where the top one here brings through all the formatting... that was in Word, it had italics, and bolds. And this version here, it comes in all scrubbed and clean. Both versions are useful, let's look at how to do those. First of all, I'm going to delete our Lorem Ipsum that we had before... because we've got the copy now, and we're going to bring it in. The easiest way is probably just to open the file in Word... and copy, paste it, nothing wrong with that. But you probably don't need me to show you how to copy and paste text. The other way you can do it in InDesign without having to open up Word... say you don't have Word... you can go, with your cursor flashing here... we can go to 'File', 'Place', like we did images. And in here, under '03 Newsletter', there's one called 'Article 1'. I'm going to click 'Open'. You can see, it's brought it all through into InDesign. One of the things it's done by default... is that it's kept the formatting that was in Word. But say you don't want that, you don't want the bolds and all the italics... because there's a lot of rubbish in there, let's say. I'm going to 'undo' it. What you'll also notice is, when I undo... actually it's not completely gone... it's actually just ended up in my cursor, which is kind of a weird quirk. So, actually what I'm going to do is, instead of undoing... I'm going to select all the text, and just delete it. Now, to get my cursor back in there, I'm going to go to the W key. You can see the box a little easier. Let's get back to here, and let's go to 'File', 'Place'. But we're going to look at a little extra bit. This is why it's quite nice to use 'File', 'Place'... rather than just copying and pasting from Word. It's these options down here, so I click on it... without opening it, I click on 'Options'. And I'm going to go to 'Show Import Options', and click 'Open'. It looks kind of complicated... but basically what I want to do is... this one here, it says 'Remove all the styles and text' from Word. Bring it in, you'll notice that it's just plain old text. Scrubbed off all the formatting. One of the other ways of bringing in text... it's the same way, with a slightly different technique. We're going to use 'File', 'Place'... but watch this, if I have nothing selected, and I delete this... Nothing selected, click in the background... 'Black Arrow', go to 'File', 'Place'. I'm going to leave the same options on... so I'm going to make sure it says 'Show Import Options', which is great. But when I hit 'Article 1'... and click 'Open' now... because I don't have that text box already on the page... and I have my cursor in it, something slightly different is going to happen. So I'm going to make sure it removes style, perfect. But you can see, my cursor is loaded now. What I can do is just click, hold, and drag our box. So we end up at the same place, depends on what comes natural to you. Do you like to draw the text box first... and then have your cursor in, and place it... or just go to 'File', 'Place', and make the text box at the exact same time. That's often what I do, but everyone's a little different for that one. All right, so that's bringing in text from Microsoft Word... or pretty much any old text document. Now let's make some columns and things. See you in the next video. 39. Creating Columns in a text box using Adobe InDesign? : Hi there, in this video we're going to go from this many columns to... this many columns. All right, let's go and do it. So what you need to do is... I'm going to have my cursor flashing inside of my 'Type' box. So 'Type Tool', click in here. And depends on your screen size... you might have to switch out like me to... if you've got a big iMac, you'll probably see it along the top... but for me, I've got to go to 'Paragraph'... and you'll see, along the top here is 'Columns'. Number of columns, I'm going to bump it up to '3'. And because we left the 'gutter', which is the space between the columns... default, when we made the document... we've left the default in here as well. So if you changed your 'gutter width'... you're going to have to change in here to match. Great, so now we've got 3 columns, super easy. So what we're going to do now... is kind of move into a little bit of production video. You can skip along if you want... but what I want to do is, I'm going to scrap all of this, cut it. Click off in the background, grab the 'Type Tool'... draw another type box. How big is it going to be? I'll adjust in a second. And I'm going to pick a font. We're going to use 'Roboto'. 'Roboto', we'll use 'Medium', or 'Regular'. I'm going to give it that red 'Fill'. And 'Size' wise, I'm going to go up to '14'. And this is going to be like a sub heading, so I'm moving him up... I'm moving him around, tidying up some of these box sizes... because I want this to be kind of like the sub header. And I want to span to 'Columns'. Fancy. 'W' off. Looking fine. This guy here is going to tuck up about here. I'm going to get rid of these extra 'returns'... so it's all lining up a little nicer. All right, let's jump into the next video... where we'll look at Justification and Hyphenation. 40. How do I justify text & turn off hyphenation in InDesign? : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Justification, and Hyphenation. At the moment, we have the text from the previous video... and we want to go from this, and then justify it like this. Nice. And then we're going to go through and turn the hyphenations off. Which are these little hyphens here... so let's go and do that now. And hyphenation's off. So let's go and learn how to do that. Let's start with justification. Easy enough one, so I'm going to grab my 'Text Box'. I'm going to grab my 'Type Tool'. Now what we want to do is make sure all of the text is selected. What's actually happening is-- can you see this red box down the bottom here? It means that there's not enough room for my 'Type' to fit. So we're going to have to-- We're going to lower the font size a little bit later anyway. So we're not too worried about it now, but I need to select all of the text. You can click in here, anywhere, and go to 'Edit', 'Select All'. That will select the text, even the stuff you can't see... because if you just do the stuff you see, it will only change that... and there'll be stuff hanging off the edge here that won't be justified. Or, what I end up doing is, it's a bit weird... but if you double click, you get the word... you go to three clicks, you get the line... go to four clicks, you get the paragraph... and if you hit five... you get the whole thing including the stuff around the outside. Seems not that quick, I know. There's other ways, like 'Control A' on a PC, or 'Command A' on a Mac... any which way you like to select them. I don't know why I use this right click. I use it all the time. It's especially good when you want to click just a paragraph, or just a line. So I've got everything selected... and I want to go up the top here, from 'Character' to 'Paragraph'. And you see, along the top here... we've used 'Left Align', 'Right Align', and 'Center'. We're going to use this one here, it says 'Justify Left'. And it just means that everything is going to align up... and be forced to the edges. I don't really like justification... because I find justification looks better visually... because that's a nice thing, everything aligns up so cutely... but in terms of reading... there can be some really big, these things here, called rivers... where you end up with kind of these gaps flowing through things... where rivers are running through big white holes... you can see a big one there. And it's also that we can make it look buttered up next to each other... but when you're actually reading it... there's some really big justification gaps. And I guess that's the trade-off, whether you want it to look nice... and then, the little boxes..... or whether you want the actual lines to read nicely. I don't really like justification... but to be honest, whenever I'm reading something... I never pick it up, and go, "Oh, justified, I can't read this." So in terms of the user experience... let's not worry about it too much. If I find some of your work, and it's justified... I promise to only lecture you behind your back. So, what we're going to do is look at hyphenation now... because justification and hyphenation often work together. And it's hyphenation, the little hyphens here... and justification forces it a little bit more-- or makes it a little bit more obvious. So I'm going to turn it off. But when I turn hyphenation off, so I've selected it all... and we're going to go up to there... so I'm on 'Paragraph', 'Hyphenation'. Click. The only trouble with hyphenation... is that it gets rid of all the little hanging bits... but we've got more gaps between them, so you got to decide. If you like justification, how much do you need hyphenation? And in terms of hyphenation... it's on by default, so every time I draw a new 'Type Box'... and I start, say let's add some 'Place over the Text'. You'll see that hyphenation is on by default. It normally is. So what you can do, if it keeps coming on by default... let's have nothing selected... so absolutely nothing in your document... then go to 'Type Tool', go to 'Paragraph'. And if you turn it on or off here... it will be set as the default for this document. I'm going to have mine set off. So there's no more hyphenations every time I draw a 'Type Box'. So in my case, I'm going to leave it justified... and I am going to make sure hyphenation is on... just because it's breaking into, I'm just--... I can't hack all these big white spaces here. So that's my balance. Delete him. That my friends, is justification and hyphenation. Let's save the document, and move on to the next video. 41. What is a the space after & leading in Adobe InDesign?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at the Space after Paragraph... and we're going to look at Leading in the same go... where we turn this text right here to... magic happens, and we've got some Space After... which is the space after these paragraphs here... and we've opened up the Leading a little bit between the lines. Let's go and do that now in this tutorial. To practice, we're going to open up a separate file. Go to 'File', 'Open'. And in our exercise files, under '03 Newsletter'... there's one in there called 'Space After'. Open that up. What I've done is, I've got two examples of how you might get 'Type'. One is, when somebody's been typing... they'll put one return in after the full stop. There's a full stop and a return... to get down to the next line. Often this comes from modern versions of Word... and modern versions of Word processors... because they add Space After by default. Older versions don't, so you have to put in two returns... to get a bit of a gap between them. So when you bring them into InDesign... they can look different like this, this one has two returns... and this one has one. How do you know there's two returns? We can look at something called Invisibles. So go to 'Type', and go down the bottom, it says 'Show Hidden Characters'. When I said invisibles, I meant hidden characters. We can kind of see here, that is the symbol for paragraph breaks. So there's been a return, and then the next line starts. Whereas here, you can see, there's a return... and then to put in another space... put in another return, so there's two of them. Let's look at how we treat both of those with our Space After. I'm going to turn off my 'Hiddens', or my invisibles. What I'm going to do is select all this text here. And what I'm going to do is go to 'Paragraph'. We were on 'Character' before, click on 'Paragraph'. The Space After is this one here. It's a little bit hard to work out who's who. We're looking for that icon, if you hover above the icon there... it will tell you, "I am Space After.".. So I'm going to click on it, and then I go up. Now mine's in millimeters, yours might be set in inches, just go up until-- There's no specific amount you need to have. It's more of a visual guide... like what you feel is a nice bit of gap between the paragraphs. So that gives you really good control... over the space between them over a long document. Whereas this one here is going to be a little bit different. Say I want to make this smaller, and what people tend to do is... if you want to make this smaller... and you do kind of cave man Space After... people just highlight this thing here, you've probably done it before. I've done it. Go to 'Character', and you make the font size smaller. You can kind of do that... but you can see the problem when I have to do to this one... then to this one, and then if the client comes back and says... "Hey, that 100 page document you're working on... can you adjust the Space After?" And you've done it this way, you say, "No, that is far too hard." So what we need to do is, we need to-- I'm going to 'undo' it a few times, so that's gone. And what we need to do is clear out the double returns. Just so they're singles, like the top here... where it's nice and easy to control. To do it, we need to remove them. We can do it manually, of course. This is only a small bit of text, so we could just go through... and actually delete the extra returns. But say it's a longer document. We want to be quick, I've selected all the text, we go to 'Edit'. There's one in here called 'Find/Change'. This is just regular find and change. Find a word, change it with another word. We're going to use this one at the top here called 'Query'. There's some pre-made, what's called grab find changes. We're going to use this one that says 'Multiple Return to Single Return'. It's going to go through all my document. That's the code, the grab code for double returns. And it's going to switch it out for a single return. And I'm going to go to 'Change All'. And it's found similar placements, and now I click 'OK'. You can see, it's done it all in one big go. I find this is a really quick, easy, helpful way. Just to make sure you've got single returns. And I've selected it all, and I'm going to add Space After Paragraph. I find 3 millimeters is good, I'm not sure what it is in inches. But it is just a personal preference. Before we go, we'll look at Leading. Space After is the gap between paragraphs. Leading is the gaps between actual lines. Because they're kind of similar, so let's select it all. And we're going to go back to character, and there's this one called Leading. Leading is an old fashioned way of calling it. Line Spacing. So what we're going to do is increase it up. The paragraph spacing is the same... but the space between the lines is different. So you adjust those separately. And that my friends is Space After. What we'll do now is go through and just adjust this one here. I'm going to first of all select it all. I'm going to make my font 'Roboto'. I'm going to make it 'Regular'. I'm going to make the font size '10 points'. Body copy in magazines, they need always 10 points. It can be a tiny bit less... not too much more, because it then becomes hard to read. 12, you'll find, if you print it off, it's quite big. Do a test, print it off, check it out, yes, 12 is too big. So you might choose 10.5 or 11. There's no official number, but 10 points is normally it. Now in terms of the Leading, I might open it up just a little bit. Defaulted to 12, I'm going to run that up to 13. And now I'm going to play around with Space After... which is just under 'Paragraph'. There it is there, I'm going to increase this up. This document is 7 inches. So that looks good. I don't like that, a little bit more. That looks okay, nice. Great. Let's move on to the next video. 42. How to underline text with a full width line in Adobe InDesign?: In this video we're going to look at doing this, where there's a line. It's kind of like an underline, but it's called a paragraph. Goes all the way across to the edge of our column here. Let's go and do that. So you might be thinking, "Underline? That looks pretty easy." "I select the text, I go up to character, and I select underline." And that is true, that is super easy. What we're going to do is a Paragraph, which is slightly different. So we're going to select this top heading here. And we're going to go out to-- We're going to be on 'Paragraph'. And we're going to go up to 'Paragraph Rules'. Easiest way to find it is, well easy. See these little three strappy lines here? Click on that, and there's one in there called 'Paragraph Rules'. Hidden away a little bit. What I want to do is, I want a 'Rule Above'. I'd like to make sure 'Preview' is turned on. I'm going to turn this 'Rule' on. And you can see, it's aligned to go all the way to the edge of the column. You can see it here, you can go to the edge of the text. But go back to being that simple things, we just want the column. We're going to keep it the same color as the text... so as the text changes, the line changes. By default, the 'Weight' is 1 pt, quite heavy. I'm going to change mine to maybe 0.5. Nice thinner line. And what we can do, depending on what you want to do... you can indent it from the left, can you see? That's kind of just filling it up to the edge there... that's not what I want to do. Turn it back to 0. Don't click return, get back in there. Back in to 'Paragraph Rules'. And, all the same, except I probably want to offset it at the bottom. Can you see, it went negative. So I want to get down, just so there's a bit of a gap underneath. And if you felt so, you could change to one of these lines here. I'm going to leave mine as it is, and click 'OK'. Easy, that is Underlining and Paragraph Rules. What we'll do in a little bit is we'll create a style... and apply it to all of these other headings at the same time. That's it, see you in the next video. 43. How do I make a paragraph style in Adobe InDesign : In this video we're going to look at... why Paragraph Styles are essential for InDesign... and are super awesome, and time saving. It means that I can do stuff like this. Highlight this, and go, boom, I'm the Heading. Go to this next line, and say, if I can click it... Go boom, on first paragraph. Construction... I'm going to stop saying boom. But you get the idea, all of this is going to be Body Copy. You can see with Styles, and life is good, and quick, and easy. To create a Paragraph Style... we're going to select the thing we want to turn into a Style... and in our case, I want to do something slightly different. I want to make 'Roboto', make it the 'Bold' version. I'm going to make it 'All Caps'. There's this little capital Ts here, to make it caps. And I'm going to make it color of our red. And you can see, the underline changed with it... because we did that in the previous video. Awesome. Do I like these colons now? Anyway, so we've done that. That's going to be my Sub Heading for all my columns. So I'd like to turn this into a Style. We do that by going to 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. There's lots of styles. This is the one you're going to use the most, 'Paragraph Styles'. So I'm going to move this over here. You're given one by default. Just like, if you've ever used Word, it's normal. Just the kind of basic one. What we want to do is, with this selected... click on this little turned up page here to create a new Style. Double click 'Paragraph Style 1'. Let's give it a name, I'm going to call this one 'Green at Heart'. I keep adding these acronyms because I work on multiple clients... and I want to know-- Because if I just call it Body Copy, or Sub Heading... you can copy and paste Styles from one document to another... and you can just have two Sub Headings, and you're like, "Hmm." You don't know what client it's for. So there's my Sub Heading, and you can see what it's pulling through. It's pulling through all the stuff that make this. Yours might be longer, or shorter, depending on what changes you've made. Mine's Roboto, Bold, 10 points, all these things are getting captured. One thing to do whenever you're making a Paragraph Style... is just to make sure it's not 'Based On'. If this is 'Based On', and it has something... that says anything other than 'No Paragraph' style... it will just run into complications later on. I like to keep them all separate... especially when you're new, makes everything super rock solid... and understandable. When you start basing it on other Paragraph Styles... you delete one, and a bit of a chain reaction happens... but just so you know, always keep an eye out on 'Based On'... and make sure it says 'No Paragraph Style'. Let's click OK. Nothing really has happened. So I'll just capture the style we can reuse. And this is what we're going to do. We're going to select this, and we're going to go... How good is that? I'm going to remove the colon because I don't like it. But it's a really quick way of sharing that around. The next thing, I'm going to delete the colon. And we're going to set some other Paragraph Styles. Now, I've got this stuff here, I would like to-- I'm going to select all of this. And this is going to be my Body Copy. I should have probably done it first, when I could select it all. But I'm going to have to select this bit and apply it to the two other parts So you'll probably start with your Body Copy... because it's easier to select it there. It's easier to select it then. But let's go and do it. So I've got it selected, it's 'Based On' the old 'Basic' one. We're going to make a new one, double click it... we're going to call this one 'Green at Hearth Body Copy". I'm just going to make sure it doesn't say 'Based On' anything else. Click OK. And that's pulled through my '10 points', it's got my 'Space After'. I know nothing's changing... but all you need to do is make sure this is applied to all of them. So, highlight this one, make sure it's 'GaH Body Copy'. Select all of this. Do the same thing, make sure it's the Body Copy. Why do we have to do it? Let's say I didn't - I'll undo that - I forgot to apply it to this. And later on, we go and make a change to that Paragraph Style. So let's have nothing selected, double click Body Copy. And in here, I want to go to 'Basic Character Formats'. Let's say the client's not using Roboto anymore. They want to go back to Arial. And we click OK. Arial is not a good enough change. Let's go and change it for Arial, and make it Bold. You can see, they've all changed... because they're all linked to this Body Copy. This one didn't, because we didn't apply it before... so I'm going to go 'undo'... Back to when life is good... and make sure you are all part of the Body Copy gang. Before we go, we're going to go and make a couple of other ones. I'll apply this one, select this one here... and I'm going to click this, click this... and this is going to be called 'Green at Heart'... Now there is a special name for this type of pull out type thing... but I can't remember off the top of my head. Let's call this one 'First Paragraph'. Make sure it's not 'Based On' anything, click OK. We'll also do it-- you'll notice that I accidentally only selected one line. So 'First Paragraph', great, over there. And I'll do the same thing for this heading here. So, this one, you... call this one 'Heading'. Call it 'Green at Heart Heading'. 'Based On', 'No Paragraph Style', click OK. So where this becomes even better... is when you start working on other pages. So I'm going to bring in some text on page 5 here. I'm going to bring in 'Article 2'. I'm going to make sure it's 'Remove All Styles'. I'm going to drag out a nice big box... for it to go in from this side to this side. Get in there. And I'm going to select it all, and put in my Body Copy first. You can see, how quick, and nice and easy that is. Then there is this bit here, which says-- That was my First Paragraph. There is my Sub Headings. You can see, now we're cooking. This is what makes InDesign and Paragraph Styles... super useful for any kind of daily user of InDesign. Let's go and leave this here now. In the next video we'll look at... updating and redefining styles after you've made them. We'll get that into it's own little video. All right, I'll see you over there. 44. How do I update a Paragraph Style in Adobe InDesign? : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... adjusting our paragraph styles... doing things like clearing and redefining styles. It will all make sense in this video. Let's go and do it now. So the first one, and the one I use the most is Redefining. Say I go into here, and actually I want to highlight this, but Roboto Bold... Actually I want to start using Roboto Slab. So 'Roboto Slab'. I'm going to use 'Roboto Slab Bold', click on him. So we've adjusted it. Now, what happens is, can you see here... it's still my sub-heading, but see this little + thing here, means that... if I highlight this, no + If I highlight this one, it means it's pretty much the sub-heading... but there are some additions you've done to it. Often, all you need to do is hover above it,. Can you see, I can't really point at it. But you can see, there it says, 'Roboto Slab' is being adjusted. It will actually tell you what's been adjusted... and you can decide, "Actually I was going to leave it like that." Or, in my case, I'm like, "I like it... and I want it to apply it to all the style." So, I want to do something called 'Redefine Style'. So what I can do is, with it selected, I right click it... and I say 'Redefine Style'. Based on the selection I have now... you'll notice that that updated, that updated, all for me. As you're working, you make some more adjustments... you like this, but you want to change it, maybe to... maybe 9.5 because it's just not fitting. And then you can right click this, and say 'Redefine Style'. And you can see, all of it came along for the right. I'm going to 'undo' that, not sure why I did that. Another way of doing that same thing... is if you have nothing selected... and if I double click, say my first paragraph here... I can go in, and say-- I want to turn 'Preview' on, just so I can see it while I'm working. Go to 'Basic Character Formats', there's lots you can do in 'Paragraph Style'. We're going to be working with, and mainly use 'Basic Character Formats'. You can see in here, 'Roboto Slab'... yes, that's perfect, that's perfect. But what I would like to do is... I'd like it to be 'Bold'. You can see, it's been 'Bold' up there. Let's click 'OK'. So that's a different way of adjusting it. You either redefine by changing it... highlighting it, right clicking it, redefining it... or have nothing selected, double click it... and then go and make your adjustments, it doesn't really matter. That's bugging me. Hyphen, grab my 'Type Tool'. 'Paragraph', hyphen gone, nice. Now the last thing we'll look at is something called clearing overrides. That just means that... say I've made this, and there's been some-- I'm playing around with the 'Tracking'... which is this space between there, say I'm going to make it really big. And let's say that it's adjusted... so you can see here, it's this, but there's a little + that says-- it's the same, except, you can see in brackets there... the 'Tracking' is at 320. That's a mistake. I'm like, "That's not meant to be like that. Why has that gone to +" So what I can do, is I can right click, or just use this button down here... that says 'Clear Overrides'. And all that it does it says... "Get rid of the things that aren't part of the original paragraph style." So let's say now that we've got this locked down... and we like this, and we're going to use this throughout our long document... and other documents, for this company that we're doing work for. So what we want to do is add it to our 'CC Libraries'. So make sure we got the 'Green at Heart' library selected up here. And we got two ways. I can have this selected, click the + button, like we did earlier... and I can say, I would like-- I don't want the 'Text Fill Color', he's already in there... but I want the 'Paragraph Style', and I can click 'Add'. There's my 'Green at Heart' sub-heading. Or you can do this, I'm going to select all of these guys. I don't want this 'Basic Paragraph', that's nothing. And I'm going to click this little icon here, it will go across. Now the cool thing about that, remember... is that, doesn't matter what document I have open now... all of these guys will come along for the ride. I've fortunately had something selected at the same time... so it's applied 'Body Copy' to it. Back to 'Sub Heading'. Buddies, we're getting a hang of these 'Paragraph Styles', aren't we? They're super useful, and... you're going to get documents that have them already... and you need to know how to adjust them... and use them especially when you're working on longer documents. If though, you are a designer, and works on really small flyers... post cards, little social media posts... then you're probably not going to use 'Paragraph Styles' like you should... but when your text is so small, and you're doing so many custom stuff... everything's different... then there might not be any reasons to use 'Paragraph Styles'... but as soon as you get into more than one page... or consistent monthly newsletters... then 'Paragraph Styles' are the way forward. 45. How to us Find & Change to remove double spaces after a period or full stop. : So one thing to check when you are working on a document... especially if you've got it from multiple sources... is that some people like to put double spaces after a full stop... And some people have single, single is the more common... double is kind of, throws back to old school typing stuff. It don't really matter, except we want consistency through our document. So, how do I know there's double spaces in here? I know because I put them in there for this example... but whenever I'm working... one of the last things I do just to make sure I'm getting my layout going... I might just need to double check they're all single spaces. Let's have a quick little look. If I go to 'Type', 'Show Hidden Characters'... I'll zoom in a little bit. Now, that didn't work. Even though it's ticked on, it's because I have the W key on. So W gets rid of hidden characters. You can see in here, see that, double dots... after all the ending there. It's gone up to three. We're going to go through and adjust those. So we're going to go to 'Edit', 'Find/Change'... and we're going to look at this 'Query' along the top here. Earlier we looked at 'Multiple Returns'... but there's also 'Multiple Spaces'. And we're going to hit 'Change All'. It's going to go through, make 15 replacements, and you'll see... they're all gone, nice. While we're in here, looking at 'Find/Change'... there's a few other things up here that could be useful for you. If you are a bit of a type nerd... and say, an 'Em-dash', it's the width of the M. The 'En-Dash' is the width of the N. So M is wider. So it's the longer dash. Some people fake it by putting dash dash, ' --' in... because they can't work on the keyboard... where that longer one is, the 'Em-dash'. So you can go through and say... actually just find all those and replace with the more proper 'Em-dash'. Other things in here... 'Phone Number Conversion', I get a lot of stuff for the US... and lot of things have that dots... in between the numbers, and I want to switch it out for spaces. 'Trailing Whitespace' is an interesting one. All that is, is when people get to the end of-- Say they're typing in Word, and they get to the finish of their story... they put in lots of return, like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. I don't know why, just, we'll do it right... it's like, "I really mean that this is the end." You only need one return... but we put in lots, and that's 'Trailing Whitespaces'. All these kind of extra returns at the end of documents. There's just a way in there to go, find, change, and remove it. But if I'm honest, I've never used that. Just interesting, I guess. Let's leave it there. Let's move on to the next video. 46. Stealing colours from images, is there a format painter in Adobe InDesign? : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at using the Eyedropper tool. We've stolen a color over there, and put it into our box. We've stolen a color from this, that matches exactly. We've also stolen this Sub Heading font, and color, and size... and reused that a couple of times. Completely bypassing the complex Paragraph Styles. A nice, quick, easy way. We love the Eyedropper tool. Let's go and do it. First thing is, let's open up our exercise file. So go to 'File', 'Open'. We're going to use one... in our 'InDesign Exercise Files'... there's one called "Eyedropper Tool', open it up. A couple of things we can do with the Eyedropper. One is, we can steal colors from images. We kind of did this with logos earlier. So with this box selected here, grab my Eyedropper tool. Now, we don't want the 'Color Theme Tool' at this stage. We want to grab the 'Eyedropper Tool' which is underneath. So hold down on the 'Color Theme Tool'... and then select 'Eyedropper Tool'. What we can do is, make sure this is selected first with the 'Black Arrow'. Then just pick a color from here, that one. If this doesn't work, it has actually worked, if I click off... and click in the background, it's actually pulled it for the 'Stroke'. The reason it did that is, if I had it selected... grab my Eyedropper tool... it's because down here, my 'Stroke' is at the front. So, InDesign thinks I mean to put it there. So what I can do now is, I can click this double arrow... which switches it around... or before I do it, which is probably more useful... I'm 'undo'ing it till it's back to normal... is I'm going to bring the 'Fill' to the front. So that's at the front there now. So, in InDesign, I mean, you, the 'Fill'... and I'm going to pick a color, this one. So with this 'Black Arrow', click on this guy, grab the Eyedropper tool. Make sure the 'Fill's in front, that's what you want to work on. And I'm going to pull a color from this. Those are horrible colors, very close to each other. So I'm going to pick a different one, maybe a red from in here. Another thing we can do with the Eyedropper, is using Fonts. We looked at Paragraph Styles earlier on, which is really cool... but say you're not using Paragraph Styles... you're just working on something small, a little flyer... you don't need all that extra level of complexity with styles. So what you're going to do is highlight the Sub Heading here... This guy, and I want to steal this. So grab the Eyedropper tool, and say, I want you. Which is really cool. Gets even better... because I don't have to then select this text here... and try and do it again. The cursor has changed, so it's kind of full of that style now. So I can keep using it, watch this. Highlight you... highlight you. And I can keep going through and doing this. So Eyedropper tool is great for stealing both colors... and stealing fonts and sizes in colors. One last use, if I go off my Black Arrow... and back to the Eyedropper tool... that kind of gets rid of that thing that I had. Actually, I want to grab the Type tool, highlight this text here. Grab the Eyedropper tool, and I want to steal this color here, brown. Highlight this text again with the Type tool. Grab the Eyedropper tool, and I want to steal the red. Great, so the Eyedropper tool can be used for stealing colors and fonts. That will be it for this video. Let's go and do the next one. 47. InDesign Class Exercise 2 - Magazine Spread: Hi there, welcome to our class exercise. What we're going to do is, we've made this one together. I'm going to get you to rebuild the next spread, pages 4 and 5. It uses the same layer, but with different text, and different copy. Now, like the last class exercise... the people that do this exercise are the types of people... that end up doing really well at InDesign... and remembering this kind of stuff. So I've created a checklist, like I did before, here it is here. I've also got it in your exercise files... so if you check out your exercise files... under 'Newsletter', there's 'Class Exercise'. There is the 'Checklist'. And also, the images and text you're going to use. We've already imported the text in the earlier exercise... so you don't have to do that again. But there's the image of this handsome man here. So, let's go through quickly what you need to do. So, you need to apply the 'None' to the master page, for page 4. That means, on your 'Pages' panel here, on this left hand 'Spread'... that is where we do not need this page number, and this box. So, I've gone through and applied the 'None' to this. If you're ringing, "Holy Molly, I don't remember doing that"... you're allowed to cheat and go back to the videos. What you're not allowed to do is copy and paste from this page. That will be too easy, we're learning. Next on our check list is adding this 'Cafe' image. So add it, and crop it in, so it fits inside that page. I said right Spread, I mean left Spread. What I'd like you to do is check the Effective PPI of this image. Make sure it's 300 or above when you're finished. You don't have to do anything. I just want you to find out where it is. Check it, make sure it's 300, or round about that before you move on. I'd like you to add this box down here. Similar to the one we did in the last exercise. Drop that in, I'd like you to put this text in here. And in this case, you're going to add the Glyph. Can you see, this Glyph here, this registered trademark Find that under the Glyphs panel. And I want you to add it after BYOL. Add this one as well. I'd like you to steal the color from the image using the Eyedropper tool. See this brown here, that came from part of his arm. You can pick any color from the image to color this box here. I'd also like you to add a Drop Shadow to it. So that's the next thing in our list. Make sure there's a Drop Shadow applied to it. Now, Ligatures, this is this page. Remember, we can pick fancier versions of this. I've picked a fancy H. I've picked a different C, and a G. Go through, sex it up with different Ligatures. Up to you really what you do in this one. Next thing I want you to do is be able to fix one of the Paragraph Styles. It's this one here. You’ll notice it's different from when we were working earlier. This now is Roboto Slab, and it's a size of 17 point. So change it, redefine the style... so that it applies to both pages. That's for Paragraph Styles. Next thing is this text. Needs to be in 3 columns, I don't mind which order you do these... mainly because I'm not there. You can do them in any order. So this has to be 3 columns. Apply all the Paragraph Styles to it, so it looks like this. I'd like you to remove the double spaces after the full stop. Remember, there's two spaces on some of them. This one definitely has it. I'd like you go and find, and change, and remove them. And I want you to make sure there's no overset text. By that I mean, see this little box here, it's clear and crisp. If I had too much text, watch this, the text box is not big enough... it overflows and there's going to be problems... mainly, we're missing part of our text. So make sure that the text box is tall enough, or wide enough... so that you can fit it all in there. The last one, is I'd like you to make a PDF. Export it, make sure the Crop marks are turned on... and in this case, I want you to turn on the Spreads... when it gets to exporting a PDF. That way, it will export, and these pages will be side by side. When you've finished, I'd like you to send me the PDF. Depending on where you're watching this, it might be a link in the comments... or it might be under the 'My Project' section. Or a screen shot, just something, I want to see what you've done. You might have Flashed it up a little bit. You might have used different images, different colors, different fonts... or you might have got it bang on, and exact. I'll hold you accountable if nobody else will, send me... I can be found by lots of social media. Just to make sure, or give you any tips, or just to say, "Nice work." Okay, lovely people, let's get into the next project... where we work on a nice long document. Kind of cool. I'll see you over there. Once you've finished your homework, do your homework. 48. How to bring in lots of text into InDesign at once? : Hi there, in this video we're going to start our long document project. It's going to be annual report, it's going to be really long. You can see the pages here. Let's have a quick little look at it, page after page after page... We're going to start with looking at Primary Text Frames... which is probably the most important thing you need to do... when you're working with long documents. And also the first thing you need to do, which is great. So, let's go and do that now. So when it comes to working with a long document... the most important part is getting... something called the Primary Text Frame set up. And to do it, you need to do it at the document creation time. And to do it, you need to do it at the beginning, when you create a document. You can't retrofit a document to make this work. It's just too hard, and actually I think it just can't be done. So if you have an existing document, and you're finding it hard to work on... you can just copy and paste it into a new document... that has the Primary Text Frame set up. So to do it, let's go to 'File', 'New', or hit this little 'New' button. We're going to be doing ours for 'Print'. We're going to be doing 'US Letter'. And over here we're going to have facing pages. Just because we're going to do a long document, side by side pages. And this is the magical button, called 'Primary Text Frame'. We're going to have 'Pages' as 1, 'Columns', we're going to have 2. And the 'Gutter' is going to be quite thick, just to match our style. Remember, mine's stuck to millimeters because I keep doing jobs in between. The 'Gutter' in this case is going to be 0.6, quite big. If you're using metric numbers, put in 16mm. So quite big. We're going to have '0.6 inches', and 'Columns', '2'. In terms of the 'Margins', all the way around. I'm going to break that little link, so they're all not the same. The 'Top' in this case is going to be '1.2' I'll go through the 'Metric' in a second. The 'Bottom's going to be '2 inches'. The sides are each going to be '0.8 inches'. If you want to do this in millimeters... it's 30 for the 'Top', 50 for the 'Bottom'... and 20 for the 'Inside' and 'Outside'. Remember, this is just because that's the way I want this document to look. You saw it at the beginning of this video. 'Bleed', who remembers what Bleed is? That's right, that's an 8th of an inch. So, '0.125', we have to use decimal places. All the way around, or '3mm', if you're using millimeters. And 'Slug', we never use, let's click 'Create'. So what is this Primary Text Frame? Well basically it's a pre-made text box that goes on your Master page. I want page 1 here, and I can click on this. There's a text box ready to go. And the cool thing about it is, if I just throw in some place holder text... you can see, it's got columns already matched into it. And the Gutter already matches the one set up on my new document. So it kind of preloads it with the text box, which is really cool. Whereas in previous tutorials... we've created these columns, and just used them a guides... and then we've gone through and grabbed the Type tool. And drawn out stuff, and then gone up here... and switched to 2 columns. It saves a little bit time that way. What's really cool about it, is that when I add text to it... it's going to generate as many pages as I need. And that is what's really helpful. Let's go and do that. Let's grab the 'Black Arrow', make sure we got nothing selected... click in the background. Go to 'File', 'Place'. You can copy and paste from Word. But I'm going to use this way, because I'm going to show you a little trick. When we bring it in, we go to 'Options'... I'm going to click on 'Show Import Options'. Then click 'Open'. This little box opens up, and by default it's going to remove the Styles. So now to make it easier for everybody... I've gone through in Word and made all the titles bold. Just because otherwise it's really hard to figure out where the titles are. I'm going to change it from 'Remove all Styles' to 'Preserve Styles'. And click 'OK'. Now, my cursor is loaded, I can stick it anywhere I like. I'm going to stick it on this page. And what we're looking for is, see my Pages panel up... I got one page, if I click on this, kick back, relax, watch what happens. So it's generated all of our pages. And you can see there's quite a few here, there's nearly 30. Wow, there's exactly 30. So that is the role of the Primary Text Frame. It doesn't seem like much, but the alternative is this. I'm going to create a 'New Document'. I'm going to do cool things, just real quickly. It's going to be the same as the last one... but I'm going to turn Primary Text Frame off. And this is what you have to do. So there's no text box here, I have to grab the text box... and that's no big drama. It doesn't take us that long, right? And I have to match the amount of columns. So I have to go to 'Paragraph', '2 Columns'. Match the width, I can't even remember what the width was. I think it was 16mm. So it's matching that now. Awesome. And now I've to go and place my text file; 'Place'. It's exactly the same, except that when I manually create that box... they're not linked to all the other pages. So I go, do the exact same thing. Happy days. You'll notice there's no extra pages generated. So what we have to do is this. We have to go down to 'Create New Page'. And then we should go to this top page. It's called the output, it's this little red cross down here. If I zoom in, that's him there. And this red, that's bad, means that there's text. We know that the text is like 30 pages, but it only stops here. That means that although we can see one page... a lot of the other pages are hidden. And it's this thing here, where this output is overset. It just means that there's too much copy in it... and it's gone red, this little + button. So what we can do is, we can go through and create another Type box. We do it in here. Make sure it's the right columns. Make sure it has got the right gutter. 'Command', I can click it, 16. And what I'm going to do is, 'Black Arrow'... click on this, click on the red thing. Come down here, click inside this. Hey, I linked up. So that one now flows from here, and flows down to here. But unfortunately it's still overset. So you're going to have to go and link all of these pages. You'll cry. To make a new document, make sure it has got Primary Text Frame... and it will generate this stuff for you. Another nice thing is, because it's on the Master page... watch this, if I double click the Master page, either the left or right Spread... I go to right Spread. If I halve it down here, I want to do something like this... can you see, all the pages adjust as well, they're well controlled. So it's generated more... and because there's not as much room on every page... it's generated some extra pages. Remember, it was at 30, now it's 38. It doesn't delete them though if I make this big. You have to manually go and delete them afterwards. You see, it's sucked back up to page 29 or 30... but there's all these empty columns. You can go into 'Preferences' and turn the 'Setting' on. That will delete them when empty. It's not on by default, it's not hard to delete them. You just got to select them all, and hit the big trash can. Last thing we do, whenever you bring in a lot of text - I'm going to go from the Master page to page 1. - is that I brought it in from Word. And we say, preserve the Styles. So what happens is, when you preserve the 'Styles'... it goes to 'Window', let's open up 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'... and it's put in all these Styles from Word... and they'll always be probably 'Normal'. 'Normal' is their body copy font. So all I want to do is, have nothing selected. Click on this guy, say, go away. It says, we're deleting it, but it's being used in this document... what would you like to do? I say, 'Replace with' my basic paragraph, which is like nothingness. 'Replace with' none, basically. So it's gone through, and even done the normal formatting. You might have a lot in here. It might have brought through heading, heading 2, heading 3, normal... Bunch of stuff. You have nothing selected, delete them all. And you'll be back to be able to adjust them as you see fit. That's a long explanation of what a Primary Text Frame is. So basically, you just need to file a new document... and you got to tick that little box. Now we know how it works, and how we could use it. Let's get into the next video... where we start laying out this long document. And look at some of the other features... that's going to make long documents super easy for you to do. 49. How do I import paragraph styles from another document?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... bringing through Paragraph Styles... that we've made in our previous document. Somebody else might have made them, or we have made them... we just want to pull them through to use in our new bit of text. So we can transform from this... through to this one... where we've got our styles and our headings all done. We'll also look at how to apply this... using things like shortcuts to speed up... to add the Paragraph Styles to all these different headings here. We’ll also add this pretty line that goes between the columns... and also look at automatic page numbering again. All of that, plus much, much more in this video. Actually, no more than that. Exactly how I said before is exactly what's in here, no more. So let's go and start it now. So there's two ways to bring in Paragraph Styles that exist already. You might have them in the document you've made... or you might be pulling them from somebody else's document. The easiest way, or the most obvious way for us at the moment... is over here, my 'CC Libraries', and in an earlier video... we looked at how to create libraries... and how to put Paragraph Styles in here. Let's open up our Styles for this document. Let's go to 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. These things here are kind of separate in the library... they're not actually part of this document here. So to add them, all I need to do is... let's have nothing selected... and right click the Body Copy here, and say 'Add to Paragraph Styles'. There's my 'Green at Heart' Body Copy, super easy. But let's say you're using an earlier version of InDesign... that doesn't have libraries... or you're still avoiding using libraries... you can do it by the 'Paragraph Styles' panel. See this fly-out strappy line here, the hamburger menu... pop that out, and in here it says 'Load Paragraph Styles'. The cool thing about it is you don't need to export the styles... from your previous InDesign file... like you do in some of the Microsoft products. What we can do is, on my 'Desktop', 'Class Files'... there's this 'Green at Heart Newsletter' we made in the previous tutorial... click it open... and it will look through that document... and see it's got the styles applied to it. Which ones would you like to begin? I don't need the basic one, remember, that has nothingness. That is that kind of normal nothingness. Or these other ones, what do I need, I don't need 'Heading'. I don't need 'First Paragraph'. Only because I'm not using them in this document. You might bring them all in. At the beginning, you're not too sure... 'GaH Body Copy' already exists... but I'll probably bring both of those through at the same time. Really, what I need is the 'Sub Heading'... that's what I want to bring in. So it doesn't really matter how you bring it in... whether you're using the 'CC Libraries'... or you just pull them from existing documents. Another way, and I said two at the beginning... but there's actually three ways. If you copy and paste a bit of text from another document into this one... and 'Paragraph Styles' applied to that text... it will bring it through at the same time. If you're finding that you're getting these "Paragraph Styles' in... you're like, "How did you get in here?" It's because you've opened up some random document... copied the text out of it... and pasted it into this current document... and it's brought through the styles with it. So you might have to, when you do that, go and tidy them up by going-- Actually I don't want you, I hit delete, and clean them all up. But I want both of these. First thing we'll do is we'll put in our 'Body Copy'... so I'm going to select it all. 'Command A' or 'Control A' will select everything. You got to make sure you're in your 'Type Tool'... and you got your cursor flashing in the text box. Select it all, remember, Dan's random five clicks. So I've got them all selected... and I'm going to say I'd like the 'Body Copy' to apply. You can see this little + applied to it... it's because some of them have Bold applied to it already. I'm going to leave those just to make it a little easier to find in my case. What I'd probably do if I was being a purist about it... I would say, down here it says 'Clear Overrides'... and you'll see, it will remove the Bolds from it. But I've left those just to make it easy for us to find. Cool, huh? It's lovely to bring through 'Paragraph Styles'... that have been done in another document. It's just tidied up this document quite a bit... even though there’s page justification, but that's okay. Next thing we're going to do is apply our 'Sub-Headings'. So, we're going to highlight this first one here, click 'Sub-Heading'. And it's brought through the style. What I'd like to do though in this document... is I want to make a few changes. I'm going to zoom in, 'Command +', or 'Control +' on a PC. I'm going to select it, make some changes. I want to change the color, so the 'Type' here... now you'll see, in my 'Swatches' panel... little bit bigger, here's my 'Swatches' panel. I don't have half of these colors. I'm going to have to pull them from my library. So in here, I'm going to make this 'Mid green'. And I'd like turn off a couple of things. I'd like to turn off the 'Force Catalyzation'. It's up the top here, I'm going to turn that off as well. So once I've done that I'm going to go and redefine my style... because I'd like this, in this document, to be forever. That green, and not upper case, so I'm going to right click it... and there's one in there that says 'Redefine Style'. Just means, now when I go and use it-- Highlight this guy, apply 'Sub Head'. This guy, I put the 'Sub Head', you can see... I'm getting that new style through. Now one thing you might find is, for a long document... this can be painful. Not too bad, right, it's not too long. So, a couple of things you can do to speed this up. One is, add shortcut to it. So if I click on 'Sub Head'... Actually, this way is to click off, 'Black Arrow'... nothing in the background... that's always like the default thing, click in the background... double click 'Sub Heading'... and in here, I'd like to say 'Shortcut'. Now unfortunately, shortcuts only work... if you got that number keyboard on your keyboard. I'm working on a MacBook Pro laptop... and it has no-- it has the numbers along the top, above the letters... but it doesn't have that separate keypad to the right. Your shortcuts have to include one of those numbers. I can't use this at all. But if you are using a keyboard that has those numbers on the side... you can hold down, maybe 'Command Shift' and hit '1'. And you'll get a shortcut in there. If you're on a PC, it will be 'Control Shift 1', I'm just making up a shortcut. You can make anything you like as long as it has those numbers there. But alas, I don't have that one, so the other way to do shortcuts... is something called the 'Quick Edit'. Now this is the shortcut to rule all shortcuts. What it does is, if I highlight above this text here... and hold down 'Command' and hit the 'Enter' key... this pops up, it's called 'Quick Apply'. If you're on a PC, hold down 'Control', and hit 'Enter'. And what this does is - I'm going to delete all of that - is you can type in anything in this whole program. If you need it to be upper case, you can see, I type in 'upper'. You can see, it goes to the shortcut of upper case, and I could do that. It's not what I want in this case, so 'Command Enter'. I want to type in 'Sub', I don't even have to write the whole word. You can see there, there's 'Sub Heading'. Hit return. Now it seems-- that doesn't seem short... but I'll show you how I get my flow on. So highlight this, 'Command Enter'... and see, it's pre filled out from my last setting, so I just hit return. So highlight, click at it, enter. Highlight, 'Command Enter', 'Enter'. You got to be a little slow between the 'Enter's. If you do it too fast, freaks out a little bit. 'Command Enter', 'Enter'. These here, actually bold points... we're going to do later on, so don't do those as headings. I thought I got all the ones bold. My bolding trick did not work. But you can start to see... doesn't matter whether you got your shortcut going... because you got the number keypad, or 'Command Enter' for the 'Quick Apply'. We can speed this up. I put lots of headings in... and then, towards the end, I got bored, and didn't put any more headings... so you find that the first half has lots, and the second half has none. That's just because of me. So we've put in our Sub Heading, we've put in our Body Copy... you can see how we've got a 30 page document all quite quickly going. And all kind of styled up. That's the beauty of the 'Primary Text Frame' from the previous video... and our little 'Styles' now. Couple of house keeping things, if I go to the W-- if you're finding your machine's running really slowly... using especially this example file... for the text, the long text... it's because you might have done 'MX Spelling' on. Because these are all Latin words, and our dictionary is set to English... it's freaking out... going every single word in this 30 page document, is spelled badly. So it's checking every single one of them. Every time we move the page, it rechecks that, which is a bit of a pain. So if you're finding that ever happens... say you're working with a document that has a lot of-- It's English, but you have a lot of French words... or Irish spelling for words, you might find that dynamic spellings... is just slowing things down. So I'm going to go, on my Mac... to 'InDesign CC', 'Preferences', 'Spelling'. If you're on a PC, go to 'Edit', down the bottom will be 'Preferences'... and go to 'Spelling'. And just turn 'Enable Dynamic Spelling' off, untick it. So it won't freak out and slow your machine down. It does, to mine all the time... when I'm using these really long place holder text documents. Another little thing, and this is just styling now... we're going to jump to our 'Master Page'. I want to put a little line that goes through the center of this. So I'm going to double click any of my master pages. How do I know I'm on my master page? I'm going to close down 'Paragraph Styles'. It's down here, my 'A-Master'. Let's zoom out a little bit so I can see the whole thing. I'm going to grab the 'Line' tool. I'm going to draw a line that goes all the way through the middle. It's pretty good at doing it straight. And I'm going to have the 'Stroke' of this one, that same green. And I'm going to have 'No Fill'. How thick is it going to be? I can't remember, '1 point', that seems okay. I'm going to copy and paste it, and drag it over here to the other side. So, what I'll do, go to page 1, hit W, does it look kind of cool? Kind of cool? Yes, looks all right. I think I'm going to have to match the same size as that... because that's a bit thick. Let's double click this. You can skip on now, because there's nothing super interesting. We're going to add automatic page numbering. I'll select them both at the same time... and I'm going to have, maybe half a point. Looks okay. So page numbering... We did this in a previous tutorial... but we're going to do it again together. Let's double click page 'A-Master'... we'll use the left 'Spread' to start with. Grab the 'Type Tool', draw out a nice 'Type Box'... I'm going to type the word 'Page'. And I'm going to put in-- Instead of just typing 1, remember we put in under 'Type'... we're going to go 'Insert Special Character'... and we're going to go 'Markers', 'Current Page Number'. What I'd like to do is... It's set to-- can you see, it's actually picking up my Sub Heading... as the default Paragraph Style... And that will happen to you if you're following me along... because I did something a bit strange. Let's go to 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. If I have nothing selected, and I click on 'Sub Heading'... it's going to set it as, every time I draw a new Type Box... it's going to be that Sub Heading. So if I set it to the 'Body Copy', and I-- So I got nothing selected, switch it to 'Body Copy', now if I draw this out... it's going to be the 'Body Copy' font. What you probably want is... you got nothing selected, be on 'Basic Paragraph'... or 'Body Copy', maybe that's a good one as well. It means that whenever I draw a new Type Box... it's not going to try and be the Sub Heading. I'm going to zoom in, make this one 'Roboto'. I'll use 'Roboto Slab' again. 'Roboto Slab Bold', and I'll use the orange color. How do I know it's in the center of the page? I know it's centered there... There's a couple of ways we can do it. You can use the 'Alignment Tool'. I'm just going to drag it to the edges, I know it's there. It's going to go down here somewhere. I'm going to copy and paste it. The cool way if I copy and paste it... And you can go 'Command C', 'Command V', or 'Edit', 'Copy' and 'Paste'. But if you grab your 'Black Arrow'... while you're dragging the words 'Page A'... you hold down the 'Alt', or 'Option' key on your keyboard... and drag it across, and it will make a duplicate as you're dragging. Hold down 'Alt', then start clicking, holding, and dragging... and that will duplicate it as it goes across. Now, I'm going to double check this work, double click page 1... double click page 2, page 3. Nice work, group. Let's move on to the next one... where we work on inserting blank pages, and playing with the numbering... because it's starts at 1, which is going to be our cover. All sorts of fun stuff like that. 50. How do I insert completely blank pages in Adobe InDesign? : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... adding blank pages to a document, like this. Because at the moment, our document is all starting at page 1... but we need some space to put in things like this. We need our blank page, and start creating our 'Header'. We need this inside blank page, contents page, this image page. So it's not actually going to start till page 5. So let's go and do that in this video. And this one is nice and quick, which will make the editors of this video... Tayla or Jason, not sure who's doing this one... but you must be very happy to see that this one is less than two minutes long. I'm stretching out the video now, let's go and do it. So to insert some pages... we could just click this little 'New Page' down the bottom here. It will 'Create a New Page'. The problem is, I put in something in the new page... that has the Master Page applied... which is the primary text frame... it has this line in the middle, and our page number. What we want to do is put in some blank pages. So I'm going to go to 'Edit', 'Undo'. And what the easiest way probably is... if we click in this little 'Pages' panel... and this little menu... and here, go to 'Insert Pages'... we could say, how many pages, in my case, I need 4. For my cover, my inside 'Spread', and the left 'Spread'... that I have my big image on. And I want to say, insert it 'Before Page 1'. And apply 'No Master' pages. Click 'OK'. You can see here, I have page 1, 2, 3, and 4... they're all blank, and the document doesn't start till page 5. Another way you could do that, is 'undo' it. And, see up here, there's one called 'None'. This is our Master Pages up the top here. And what we can do is, where it says 'None'... just drag this 'None' one down, at the beginning here. Just keep dragging, drag, drag, another one. Drag it to a gap. This is the reason probably why I don't do it this way. It can be a little hard, it's easy for one page... but when you start to put in 'Spreads' and stuff-- So I'm going to bin those. That is the end. A really short video. You're welcome, Tayla and Jason. 51. How do I create a gradient in Adobe InDesign?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at creating a Gradient... like this one here, in the background. So let's go and make it in our document. So, I'm on my page 1. So 'Pages' panel, I double click page 1. I'm going to zoom out a little bit, I'm going to keep the 'W' key off. I'll click it so I can see all of my working. Why? Because I need this to go over into my 'Bleed'. So I'm going to grab my 'Rectangle' tool. Don't worry about what color or Fill it has at the moment. Just drag a box that covers everything including our Bleed. And we'll amend the Fill. Just make sure your 'Stroke' is set to 'None'. Even then, if I had a Stroke, it would be cut off... and there would have been some big drama there. So what we want to do is, we're going to go to-- The reason we don't worry about filling it with the color... is, if I fill it with the color... it's just going to be replaced by our Gradient in a second. Open up 'Gradient's, go to 'Window', down to 'Color', and go to 'Gradient'. With your Black Arrow, the Selection tool here... make sure this box is selected. You might have to grab the outside of it, the edge of it... if it has no Fill. And we're going to select 'Type', and go to 'Linear'. Now we're going to talk about Linear all the way through this tutorial... but you could switch it to 'Radial', and everything applies the same. So 'Linear', by default you give him 'Black and White'. We're going to do it once with freehand colors... and then we'll do it with corporate colors. This little white house down here, this little box, if I click on it... I'm going to switch my colors, so you need to be able to see Color panel. And in here, you can just pick colors from this. If there are no colors in here, you can click on this little flap menu... and because we're going to be working in RGB for most of our documents... we're switching it to that. Then you should be able to pick a color. So pick a color, do the same for the other end. So pick the Black. And this one's defaulted just for our Black side, which is not cool. Go to RGB, pick another color. And, that my friends, is horrific. So, green to pink gradients is banned. I think they're illegal in most countries, definitely here in Ireland. So to change the direction of this... there's a whole tool for it... it's called the 'Gradient Swatch' tool, click on this. And all you do is click, hold, and drag, drag... And you can play around with the angle. You can manually type it in, see the angles here. If I want it to be 90°... I can have it straight up and down, 0° is going to do left and right. Watch this, I can make a really small line as well. Makes a kind of just a little band. We're getting 80s right here. Look at that. Feels like a Jane Fonda exercise video. Not that I ever watch one, but that is what I feel like has happened. These colors would combine in a Gradient. If you want to use corporate colors-- I want mine to go straight up and down, so I'm going to do 90° Or I can click and drag across this... to get it going straight up and down. And what I'm going to do, it's a little weird... I need to see this Gradient panel. But I also want to see my Swatches panel. So what I need to do is find my Swatches. Do I have them all applied here? I don't. Some of them are over here. And the problem with CC Libraries at the moment is... you can't drag from the CC Libraries panel into the Gradient panel. So what I'm going to do is select all of these. Actually I might 'undo' to get my Gradient back. Click off in the background, so with nothing selected... I'm going to make sure all of these are added. So I'm going to right click them, and say 'Add to Swatches'. So now they're all part of this, down the bottom here. And this is the stuff that I want, so grab my Black Arrow... click on this guy, and with this house here... the first one, I'm going to pick mid green. Click, drag, drag it. You've got to be really careful. Can you see, it goes black there? Means I'm replacing that one. If you don't, if you get it kind of close, but not quite, watch this. Get close in there, and you end up like this, all one little mix there. If you're doing that with this, and there's two of them... you can just click, hold, and drag the one you don't want, off. Just kind of drag it down to no man's land. So with this green, to start with... I'm going to grab my dark green to replace this one. And that is my beautiful Gradient. Is there another way around? Yes, I've got it in my example. And that my friends is how to make Gradients. Now if you're following along with this tutorial series... we're going to add a few extra little parts. We'll add this image down the side here, and this logo, and this text. First thing we're going to bring in is this text. So let's go to the Type tool. Actually I'm not going to bring it in, actually just type it out. So whenever I'm working with a big colored background like this... you can see my Type tool wants to turn this box into a Type box. So what I'm going to do, Type tool, on this side, type it out. I'm lazy, I'm going to copy and paste it from here. You're going to have to type out 'Green at Heart Annual Report', and Style it. It's up to how you style it. That's how I've done mine. The big thing with my type is that I've used the same font... but I've used that old version... and this one here is the light version of Roboto Slab. And I've made this font a little smaller... just so that they both line up on either side. Do they look good? It's okay. Next thing I'm going to do is bring in my image. So I'm going to have nothing selected. Go to 'File', 'Place'. And in here it's going to be called 'Green Logo4'. Now this keeps appearing, we're not going to do anything for these changes. I'm going to turn that off. It's a bit of a pain whenever you turn on the 'Show Import' options. So 'File', 'Place'. This down here was awesome when we bring into text... but now it's a pain for images, so there's nothing we want to change. Click and drag it out. How big is this going to be? It's going to kind of sit down here... like this document here, so maybe a bit big. 'Command Shift', drag it down, a bit smaller. To bring in my image, it's 'File', 'Place', we got nothing selected. And I'm going to bring in my image, this one. Not him. 'Table Top', that's it. And I'm going to click, and drag it, so massive. I might have to actually zoom out a little bit. It's hard to work with full size images. And you're very close, I'm going to make mine very, very big. And I'm going to align mine up, something like this. I’m going to make sure it aligns up there. Make sure it aligns at the bottom already. And I'm going to drag this side across. How far is it going to be across? Yes, that far. I'm sure it should be like a third, but I'm just going to wing it. Hit 'W'. Looks alright. Now, one of the big things that's happened... is that, underneath there is my image. Because he was placed in the newest, he's at the top. So what we need to do is play with our Arrange. So I want to push him backwards. So I'm going to right click him. And go to 'Arrange', I don't want to 'Send to Back'... because it will get behind the Gradient box, so 'Send Backwards'. So it goes behind the last thing, which was our image. I'm going to put him roughly in the middle. And that is Arranging. What we're going to do in the next video... is we're going to look at doing Layers. Why? Because arranging is fine... but sometimes it's just a pain to have a background image on every layer. You just want to put it in its own layer, and lock it. So we'll look at layers in the next video. 52. Do I need to use layers in Adobe InDesign?: Howdy fellas, in this video we're going to look at Layers in InDesign... where we split our contents, we've got text at the top... and we got our images underneath. And we can lock one of the layers, so that when we try and drag on it... we can't move it around, it doesn't get in our way... but know that when you're working with Layers in InDesign... you're one of the few. When I'm working with InDesign... 99% of my jobs do not use Layers. It can be useful if there's things you need to separate out, and lock. Most of the time, know, they're not that complicated documents... and often you just ignore the layers panel. But we've got to use layers. In this case, it is this background. I want it stuck in the background... where I don't move it, doesn't get in the way. You might have a watermark in the background. It might be a map you're drawing over... and you just don't want it to move... to put it on it's own layer and lock it. Let's go and do that now. The first thing we need to do is find the layers. They're under 'Window', and there's an option here that says 'Layers'. Just next to 'Pages' here. You're given 'Layer 1' by default. We're going to rename ours by double clicking 'Layer 1'. I'm going to call mine 'Main Copy'. We'll leave the color just fine. We'll actually leave all the defaults, and click 'OK'. So we've done nothing really, except renamed our layer. Let's make a new layer. This little turned up page here, create a new 'Layer'. This is going to be called my 'Background'. What I'd like to do is... the background-- So I want to move this gradient and this image on to that layer. So I stop selecting it, makes it less annoying. And I can turn it on and off if I need to. To do that, what we can do-- See over here, there's my main copy. This is where everything is on at the moment. If I tick this little arrow here... on this particular page, all of these things here. So there's a 'Logo', I can turn the 'eyeball' on and off. And there is that 'Graphic'. There is the 'Text', and there is the 'Gradient'. So what I can do is, I want the gradient. So I'm going to click, hold, and drag him to the background layer. Now, if you drag it a bit high... it gets that ghost busters go away, caution kind of symbol. You want just bit below. And then it will go into the right layer. I'll 'twirl' down background, here he is. And the other thing I want was-- You'll notice as well that if I 'twirl' both of these up now... that the background is on top of the main copy. So I can't see anything past this gradient. So what I'm going to do is click, hold... and drag gradient - see that line that appears - underneath the main copy. Let's have a look at the main copy as well... and just say, I want you my friend, which is-- Who is you? Your Table Top is too big. I'll grab this and drag it on top of the background. Or just below it, and it goes inside. Now what we can do is, I can double check we're on the right layer... by turning the 'eyeball' on and off for that whole layer. They will disappear because they're white, this stuff on top. What I want to do is I want to lock this. And this empty box here... you're meant to just know that's the locking icon. So just click in the box next to the word, and now... what happens is I can't move it. With it off, I can move him around, and they get in my way... but what I want to do is, click on this, lock it. And it just means these can stay in the background. It might be a water mark... it might be some sort of map you're drawing over the top of. You can lock on its own layer,... but know that a lot of people don't use layers in InDesign. But there's going to be times when you need it. I'll show you one of the times that I use it quite a bit, is during my notes. Here's some of the notes that I write for another course of mine. This is an After Effects course I do. If you look under Motion Graphics, go check out that course. There'll be a link on the screen here. What you'll see here, in my layers panel... I have a tutor's notes and a student's notes. And what I do is, if I turn the 'Tutors' on and off... it kind of adds a level of text across the top. It adjusts here, and what I do is add teacher's notes to this layer. Say things like, "Now would be a good time for the teacher to... explain this concept,' or something. I build classes for lots of other teachers, and they have to go through... so I have a bit where I can turn it off... hit 'Make PDF', and that goes out to the students for the class. And then I have a teacher version that I turn on... and I just write notes in here for the teacher only. So they print, and make a second PDF... for them, with their notes on it. All using the same InDesign file... but I can make two separate PDFs very quickly... by just turning it off, 'Export PDF', turning it back on. 'Export PDF' for the tutor. The other reason I show you here is that, even if you don't use it... there are people that are, and there'll be templates you'll download that do... and if you don't know how layers work that can be very confusing... because you think you're selecting them, and they're all under different layers. That can be a little bit of a pain. One of the big pain is sometimes people have them non printing. So what they'll do is they'll go into our document here... let's go to our 'Layers', and let's say that-- I'm going to double click the word 'Main Copy'. And people can do the separate layer, you can turn it off. If I hit 'Print' now, none of this text is going to actually print. I've spent days trying to work out why... my InDesign file exported to PDF without a whole layer of stuff. And it's because somebody turned that off. So that's just a little heads up... in case you get stuck with that exact same problem. Layers can be turned on to not print. Let's click 'OK', and move on to the next video. 53. Opacity advanced, mater marks and Transparency Effects in Adobe InDesign: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Opacity. So, we've put this in the background... kind of there's a watermark. We'll show you how to put on, every page like a watermark. But what we came here for is this guy. This is kind of transparency... but it doesn't nicely reflect with the background. Kind of a richer, rather than a washed out thing... that happens normally when you're just playing with opacity. It's something called Blending Modes. So let's go and do that now. So the easy one, I'm going to make sure I'm on my 'Main Copy' layer. And I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place'. I was going to do a nice washed out watermark. So I'm going to grab the 'Green Logo4'. And I'm going to click, and drag a nice big version of it. I'm going to put it down here, like this. And I'm going to lower the opacity. We've done this in an earlier tutorial... so we're not going to spend too long on it. Nice kind of watermark thing. Now if you want it on every page... say it's a washed out image in the background on every page... just make sure it's on your 'Pages' panel, and it's on your 'A-Master'. So double click 'A-Master', and put it on these two pages. It will appear in the background on all the other pages. I'm not going to do mine now, because mine's white... you're not going to see it. One thing with transparency, is if you are working with it... is to make sure you get a proof made... because the opacity that looks on your screen... I bet you if I open this actual InDesign document... on lots of different laptops... you will see that they all look different. So, you might be thinking, "Yes, that's just the perfect amount of opacity." But when you send that off to your printer, it comes back... and it's either way too bright, or way too dull. I've done it before, I've just sent off business cards... came back, and you couldn't even tell I had a watermark. Which was not a big problem... but I've had the other way, when proofs have come back... and the watermark is really, really strong. It just over powers the white text as well. So get a proof down from your printer... to say "I want you to print the front cover only." "Send me a proof," often it will cost you. They normally call that a wet proof. Or if you just print it in your office, easy peasy. Print it off, and check. Let's look at the more advance transparency... where we start looking at layer modes. First up, let's grab an image for this page 2, so double click page 2. 'File', 'Place'. Let's go to 'Image 1', click 'Open'. And I'm going to click, and drag it out a certain size. I'm zooming out holding down 'Command Shift'. Dragging it so it is roughly bigger than my page. And I'm going to go now and re-size it, and reproducing it. 'W' is to get all my guides back. Chuck it all in. The center there. And line it all up with my 'Bleed'. And you can use the 'Content Grabber', or double click it, and move it across. Click in the background to deselect. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to grab the rectangle tool. I'm going to draw a rectangle that kind of fits this little space... where our pull quote's going to go. I'm going to give it a 'Fill' of 'Green at Heart Red'. Get back to 'Selection' tool. And this is where it's going to get interesting. I want to do some stuff-- opacity is going to work, if I lower it down... but it ends up looking quite washed out. And that's not the effect I want... or all that we saw at the beginning of this video. So what we do is, turn the 'Opacity' back up to '100'. What we're going to do is play around with 'Object'. We're going to look at 'Effects'... and we're going to play around with this one called 'Transparency'. So, slightly different from opacity. Very similar effect if you just leave it on normal. I'll lower it down, it looks the same as opacity. But what I'm going to do is... start playing around with these things called 'Layer Modes'. You can see, instantly, the first one multiplies a whole lot better. You can just work your way through. Don't worry too much about this, this is not a perfect one every time. It will depend on the color you have at the top, in our case, red. If yours is blue, it will look different with these settings. So just work through your image, how it affects yours... and have a look through. Kind of ends up the one I want. Go through them all, find the one you like. You can lower down the opacity afterwards. Say you like color images not to be so strong. And that's how we do some more interesting transparency... when you add this thing called 'Blending Modes'. Let's click 'OK'. That will be it for this video. I'll see you in the next one... where we start looking at rounding these corners. Fancy. 54. How do I add rounded corners to an image or box in Adobe InDesign?: Hello InDesign people. We're going to look at Rounded Corners. We're going to do it to this box that we did with this cool transparency. We'll just do one corner. Like this guy, but you can also do four round corners... and all these other weird corners that you're probably never going to use. So let's go and look at Rounded Corners in InDesign. So we're going to practice with a box over here. So grab your rectangle tool, and click, hold, drag out a box. Give it a 'Fill' color, and no 'Stroke'. So I'm going to give it a 'Fill' of our 'Green at Heart Red'. And I'm going to give it a 'Stroke' of 'None'. Okay, Rounded Corners, grab the 'Black Arrow', click on this. And you've probably always wondered what the hang this thing is for. I know this is for editing the corners, give it a click. And nothing happens. But you get these diamonds in the corner. So grab on the yellow diamond, let's grab the top right. Click, hold, and drag to the left, and... you my friends, now have Rounded Corners. So if you end up clicking off by accident, click back on. Click this square, it launches the diamonds. And you can go back and start dragging. A little left and right, not up and down. We'll increase them up a little bit... and let's look at the different kinds of corners. By default it's set to Rounded Corners... but you can see, by that pop up window here... you can hold down the 'Alt' key on a Mac, or 'Option' key-- no, backwards. It is 'Option' key on a Mac, and 'Alt' key on a PC. Go click... and you get like pixels, space invaded version of the corners. I've never used these. Keep holding down that key. 'Option' on a Mac, 'Alt' on a PC, keep clicking. You get those ones, those ones. And eventually they pop back into the corners. And you've got to ?? options, and drag them back out again. It's up to you. Now one of the things we're going to do... is show you how to do them individually. So, I'm going to click and drag them back into the corner. As far as it will go, we'll get them to being nice sharp corners. Now if you hold down the 'Shift' key on your keyboard... hold it down, and then start dragging to the left. This happens quite a bit with these kind of factoidy things. I'm going to click on this. To get the corners, hold down 'Shift', grab this one... and make this kind of like a rounded corner. We're going to put a little pull quote or a factoid in there. That's where maybe this corner one becomes okay. So I'm going to click on this one. Drag it. Just this one. And I'm going to hold down 'Alt' key, or 'Option' key. And then you could do something like that. The cool thing about that is, it's kind of part of it... and it can be re-sized in all sorts of other nice things. All right, that is Rounded Corners. Let's move on to the next one where we look at some Drop caps. Drop caps are cool, let's go do that. 55. How to add a large first letter to my text aka Drop Cap?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at what a Drop Cap is. It's the name for the joint first letter and a paragraph, used for story books... and in our case, this [light little factoidy pull quote thing]. Let's go and do that now. First up, let's bring in our text. So, have nothing selected, go to 'File', 'Place'. In our '04 Long Document', there's one in there called 'Factoid 1'. Click, hold, and drag out, we got our text. Now I'm going to select all this text, I'm going to make it... 'Roboto Slab Light'. I'm going to make the font size '20'. And I'm going to make the font color 'Paper'. In our case, white. Drag it across, using the 'Black Arrow'... just get it to roughly fit, we can fix this up afterwards. Now to do the Drop Cap, grab your 'Type Tool', select the 'Text'. Actually, you can have your cursor flashing... anywhere in the paragraph you want to work with. Doesn't really matter. And what you can do is... switch it from 'Character' to 'Paragraph Formatting Options'. And the Drop Cap is this one here. If you hover above it, you can see it there. If you click once, nothing happens. It's a bit disappointing. '2' though, you can start to see what happens down the bottom. '3', you can see, where it's crossing over one line... it's already crossing one line. I'm not sure why it jumps to 1, but you can cross it across 2, or 3. And you probably not, in this instance... but you can-- See the one next to it, this is how many across the Drop Cap goes. This can be really handy if you've got-- Say you want to do a Drop Cap, and it's like this, 1... maybe, you've got like a numbering system... and you want to go across, because you want that... or that.... or... they all look pretty horrible. But, if you've got more than one you need-- I'm going to get rid of all of that. The other thing you can do is - I'm going to put mine back to the I. - is I can select it and... you don't have to, but in my case, it's on 'Light'... I'm going to move it to 'Bold'. Just to make it look a little nicer. All right, that's it for Drop Caps. I'm just going to align mine up a little nicer within this box. How's it looking? I'm okay with that. All right, let's get on with the next video. 56. How do I increase the space between letters in Adobe InDesign aka Tracking or Kerning?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at something called 'Tracking'... or it's called 'Kerning'... but what you're really doing is... you're playing around with this space between letters. You can see here, I've tightened this one in, and I've opened this one out. So let's go and look at how to do that in InDesign. A nice quick one, if I select my title here-- My problem is that, this is actually just in front of it... so I'm going to actually grab it. Go to 'Layers' panel, unlock the 'Background', and say... "You giant thing, go in the background layer." You're more appropriate back there, then I can lock it again. So Tracking, now I can select on him. If I select all of this-- The Tracking is under 'Character', it's this part here. The Tracking is out, out, out... just switch between letters, easy, easy... You can, so out is interesting. And in, don't be afraid, you can go in as well. So mine is '-50', you're going to kind of tighten it all up. I'm going to tighten mine up to maybe '-30'. There isn't much difference, you got to decide. I play with the Tracking. People call it Kerning as well. Kerning is the built-in default tracking, it's overriding it. I'm going to select all of this, and go to '0', and you just watch it. Undo, redo, undo, redo. Undo. I like a bit of Tracking. The other thing we'll do while we're here is we'll do the Leading. So, with 'Character' selected... the Leading is this guy, set to 'Auto'. I can play around with it to tighten it up, I'm not going to increase it. Just to get it perfect, I wouldn't do this for all titles. But the cover is a little bit of a special case. Now, couple of shortcuts. With all of this selected... I can do Tracking by holding down the 'Alt' key on a PC... or 'Option' key on a Mac. And using my left or right arrows. Right pushes it out, and left tightens it up. Same key, 'Alt' or 'Option' and hit the 'Up' and 'Down' key. I never use these options up the top here. I just select all of this, say this title here, I go up a little bit. I just kind of work back and forth. You can work with separate letters, you might decide that spaces... It's actually quite a well-spaced font, but say this one here is a bit tight. I can open up just the Tracking of that one a little bit. So when I match this one... because I'm playing around with the shortcuts. All right, that's it for Tracking... and we're through in Leading, shortcuts, for good measure. 57. How do I get text to move around an image or shape using text wrap?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Text Wrap. And that means, this red rectangle in the background... has a little bit of space around it... and it pushes the text around. Same thing with this cool little image here, when it moves... you can see the text is like a little invisible force field around it. So let's go and learn how to do that in InDesign. So first thing is, we're going to put it on page 7 here. We're going to do two things, we'll do it with just a plain rectangle first... and then we'll do it with an image. So let's grab the rectangle tool. And let's draw a rectangle in the center here. I'm going to give it a 'Fill' of... 'Green at Heart Red'. And what I'd like to do is put some text in... and I kind of like this factoid up here... where it's just a nice text pulled out, interesting text piece. You see, at the moment... this object doesn't do anything to the text underneath it. I'm going to put it in the middle there. We're going to make the text Run Around. It's either called Run Around or Text Wrap, depending on your industry. By default it's off. What we're going to do is Run Around this third option. So it's going to Run Around the edges of this object. Now it is running around, can you see? If I move the text, it's all pushing the text around, which is cool. But it's butting up right to the edge. What we can do is increase it a little bit. You see this little invisible border coming out from the edges. That will allow us to have a box, and keep the text away from the edges. Now, that works great for an object. Let's look at doing it like we had-- actually let's put him over this side. And we'll do our image on this side. It's just an extra step to do. So let's go to 'File', 'Place'. What we're using here is this 'Adobe Stock Preview'. Adobe Stock is a paid site. This image in particular is not paid. So I'm going to shrink it down to a more appropriate size. So if we wanted to use this, let's say we're just mocking it up for a client. Once they approve it, you can go and pay for the image... but at the moment we got this preview version, which means it's free. But it's got this watermark we can't get rid of. So what I'd like to do is, with this selected, I'm going to flip it over. So with it selected with the 'Black Arrow'... there's this option at the top here, 'Flip Horizontal'. So here it slips to the other side of the page, not cool. I'm going to have it somewhere down here. Now if we do this same thing we just did for that red box... watch this, I go to that option here... and it is working, and pushing the text away. I move it around-- oops. Don't click the center of it, so grab you, move it around. It's pushing the text around, but it's not quite what we want. We want it to wrap around the edges of this. And this technique will only work if it's on a white background. So if you've got an image it's got a big colored background image here... it's not going to work. So, white background is easy. What we need to do is, this option here where it says 'Contour Options'... if yours doesn't have that... you might have to double click this thumb nail here. Or there's an option here that says 'Show Options'. Down the bottom, there's one that says 'Same as Clipping'. Click this one that says 'Detect Edges'. And because it's on a white background it's able to do that. Now let's put Text Wrap around the edges here. And it is working, but the problem is that... this image is on top of the text-- It is actually working, I just need to move it behind this text... because this guy is still at the front... so I'm going to click on him with the 'Black Arrow'. Right click him, and I'm going to say 'Arrange', 'Send to Back'. You can see, now it's wrapping around the edges... so it's not covering it. One of the problems, just like we had with this guy... is that it's too close. Exact same principle, I can increase this. Little bit of an invisible border appearing around it. That looks kind of cool. 'W', 'W'... So that's Text Wrap. One of the things we're going to run into... is when we start adding text to the top of this... it's going to try and push out as well. So we'll do that in the next video. I'll see you over there. 58. Why can’t I put text over anything that has text wrap applied?: So what we want to do in this video... is we want this text to go over this red box. Sounds simple, but if you're trying to do it now, and it's not working... because, you put it over and it just disappears... it's because the text wrap is not turned on. Same with this little skew number down the bottom here... we want to get this, so it goes over the top of this image... even though it's got text wrap applied. So let's go and do that now in this video. So first up, let's do it to this box here. What's going to happen is, I'm going to bring in, I've got nothing selected. I'm going to bring in some type using my shortcut now. We're into shortcuts. 'Command D', or 'Control D' on a PC. It's factoid 2. I'll click, hold, and drag it out over here. I'm not going to worry about the styling just yet... because we're going to have this first brought on. 'Black Arrow', click, drag, drag. I've kind of half dragged it on to show you what's happened, and you can see... the bit that doesn't cover the rectangle... is all kind of squished over here... but as I keep moving it across, it really doesn't want to go... because we said, to this red box, "Text Wrap"... which affects every single bit of text, even the stuff on top of it. So what we're going to do is I'm going to click off. Actually I can leave it there, doesn't matter. And with it selected, I can go to 'Object'. And there's one called 'Text Frame Options'. And in here there's one that says 'Ignore Text Wrap'. With preview on, you can see in the background, he's now all good. The same with any objects. Do the same with this guy, I'm going to add our copyright. So I'm going to go down here. Actually I'm going to put in the skew number. So this is a product, we're allegedly selling. And I want it there so that people could buy it as well... but you see, it's getting pushed over. So all I do is, 'Object', 'Text Frame Options'. And 'Ignore Text Wrap'. And he's behaving as he should. Before we go, we'll go through and style this one. I'm going to make it 'Roboto Slab'. And I think, 'Light', can't remember. '16 points'. I'm going to make it 'Black'. When I said black, I meant white. And I'm going to do our... Drop Cap. Maybe just 1 in this case. Move it all a little bit. Now I'm just messing about. Maybe a little bit more. I'm going to turn off hyphenation, I even had two, how, I wonder. So, put down that one. That one's actually final size, select it all. What size is it? It is '8'. So you might have to lower yours down a little bit. I'm going to move him up, he's there, he's there, nice. What I'd like you to do before you finish... is I want you to do an example on page 8. So it looks like this when you're finished. There's page 8. Bring in this image, it's in the '04 Exercise File'. And I want you to put in a little skew number, make it up. If you don't know what skew number is... it's generally the way that shops record product names, or products... so they can use it at the tills. Or re-order them, it's the code, rather than the name of the product. Anyway, useless information. So I want you to bring in this, give it a text wrap... put this skew number on top... and obviously we'll have to get that text... to ignore the text wrap so it sits on top. So go through and do that. Send me a screen shot, prove you've done it. I'll give you a high five. And we'll get on to the next video. 59. How to draw an arrow or triangle or star in Adobe InDesign? : Hi, there, in this video we're going to make all sorts of different shapes. Such as stars, triangle, I think, a polygon. Some sort of male symbol, but really just looking at arrow heads. Perfect squares, and perfect circles. In the next video, we're going to stick images inside of them all. All very exciting, let's get on with it. Actually, before we get on with it, I apologize for the design. I couldn't think of a really good exercise, that look cool... but also showed every single shape possible in InDesign. So, we're living with this, this design choice. Let's get on with it. Hi there, if you're following along, what we're going to do is... we're going to jump down to page-- double click page 10. We're going to put it in here, so we're going to put in a blank page... because we don't want this text to be covered. So what we're going to do is, the little 'Pages' flap menu... we're going to go to 'Insert Pages'. I'm going to say, 'After Page' '10'... I would like to insert a page that has no 'Master' applied. And what I meant was, after page 9. You can click, hold, and drag it. And put it on the 'Right' side. Yes, do it after 9. First thing we're going to do is... let's look at putting a background color in. I'll hit 'W' so I can go from 'Bleed' to 'Bleed'. Again, this is not my best design. But we're learning how to makes shapes... and I couldn't think of a better exercise. So, 'Rectangle' tool, I'm going to make this one 'Red'. What we do is, when we're drawing shapes, any shape... if you want it to be the same width as height... like a circle, perfect square... is you hold down the 'Shift' key. So I'm going to draw a bit of a rectangle here. I'm going to give it a 'Fill' of my 'Red'. And I'm going to give him a 'Stroke' of 'None', easy. For circle, click and hold down the 'Rectangle' tool... underneath is the 'Ellipse' tool. With the 'Ellipse' tool selected, I'm going to draw out... If I don't hold down 'Shift', I can do a custom shape.... in your, where it saved Ellipse. If you want a perfect circle... just like the square, we hold down the 'Shift' key. I'm going to get mine to go across to the edge here. We're going to practice our 'Text Wrap' once we finished. So that's a circle, give it a random color... because we're going to replace this one in a second with an image. Let's look at some of the other shapes we can make. So, this one here, the Polygon tool does quite a few different jobs. So click on it, by default, if I drag it out... it does not do stars, if I click on it. Yours probably, by default does that. It does a Pentagon. So, that's what it's going to do by default. If you want one of these shapes... I'm going to put one here. I'm going to give it a 'Fill' color. I'm going to fill this with an image as well... so I'm just going to pick a random color. I'm not going to use one of our lovely colors. So that's our Pentagon. Next thing I want to do is do a triangle. And you do that with the exact same tool, the 'Polygon' tool. What you do is, you just click once. Click once anywhere, don't click and drag. You can tell it to do things, you can say... "Actually I want it to be a Polygon height and width... but actually I want it to be size of '3'." And it's going to be a Polygon that has... three sides, which is our triangle. I'm going to make him a bit stubbier, and stick him over here. So, Polygon makes V shapes... and triangles, and it also makes stars. So, same tool, 'Polygon' tool... click once, what I'm going to do is I'm going to have 5 sides... but instead of getting this Pentagon... I'm going to do this thing, called the 'Star Inset'. And if you do it just, a lot... if you do it a lot, like 50%, you get this kind of traditional star. So I'm going to 'undo', just drag it up now. I'm holding 'Shift' to get a perfect star. What color is this going to be? I'm running out of colors. So, that gives you that star. If you want to do something like, more of a star burst... or those-- I'll show what they look like. If you buy any wine, if you buy wine like me at the store... you'll look for cheap wines, it has lots of these gold labels. Lots of prices and stuff, that's how I buy my wine. Cheap with lots of stickers that said it won an award. Never checked the awards, just bought one. So what we're going to do is click once. Click once, and instead of 5 sides, we're going to do 50. And it's still the 'Star Inset' being really big. If I leave it like that, you end up with this really big star thing... which might be cool, that might be what you want... but what I want to do actually, is I'm going to click once... and I'm going to have the 'Star Inset' only at '10%'. And then you get this kind of, more of a foiled sticker thing. So I am going to do that, move it down here. So we're getting through the shapes. One of the other ones I promised you was arrow head. I need to start off with a line. So we kind of moved it away from these tools. Grab the 'Line' tool, and click, hold, and drag a line. My line, unfortunately by default, doesn't have any 'Stroke'. So you have to have a 'Line', you have to have a 'Stroke' around it. All these other shapes will work in the 'Fill's. Lines, like the straight line here, needs a stroke around the outside. And I'm flummoxed to think what color now. Let's just pick this one. No, it can't be that one, we'll pick dark. And the thickness, is just here. Or you can use your 'Stroke' panel, they end up doing the same thing. The reason we're going to keep the Stroke panel open... is because of the arrow heads. Yours might be set to this... where your Stroke panel is quite small, I picked '20 points'. Go to the hamburger menu here, and click 'Show Options'. And where it says 'Start/End', these are where the arrow heads go. So, I would like it to-- I'm never sure if it's starting or ending, but we'll just start over there. Let's do this, I wanted to have a pointy arrow head. That works for me. And the end of it is going to be... our circle thing, remember the male symbol? And the scale down the bottom here, you can see... it's where the circles are a lot bigger than they are. You can play around with the Scale here... just to get the arrow head, I'm just smashing away, holding it down... You need to get it quite big to kind of maybe make them proportionate. Obviously you don't have to have that big circle thing at the end. You can have nothing, or you can have a bar. And that my friends is how you do arrows. So, stars, triangles, polygons... and circles, and squares. Let's get on to the next video... where we start cropping in images inside of them. 60. How do I put an image inside other shapes like a circle - cropping?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... getting images inside of shapes. Circles, Pentagons... It's pretty easy, let's go and do that now. So there's two ways, let's do the easy way. Let's have nothing selected, 'Black Arrow', click in the background. Let's go to 'File', 'Place'. In your exercise files, go to '04 Long Document'. And go to 'Cafe', let's bring him in. Obviously, you can bring in any image you like. Now, I'm going to click, hold, and drag it out to an appropriate size. You might click once, and then have to re-size it. To get it into something, because it's going to go inside this circle, right? So what I'd like to do is-- So this is an easier way... because you can work on this image separately. Then kind of get it positioned over where you want it. Make sure it's big enough to actually cover the circle... otherwise we'll see a strip of the pink through there. So I'm going to make it a little bigger. Roughly, we can adjust that afterwards. Then we're going to 'Edit', 'Cut'. Select on the 'Circle'. And go to 'Edit', 'Paste Into'. We can do some adjustments afterwards by grabbing the 'Content Grabber'. Move it around, or just double click anywhere, then move it around. So that's how to paste inside. Couple of things you might run into with problems. I'm going to 'undo' that. He's back, if you don't have it above where you want it to go... If I just leave him kind of way, willy nilly, and go to 'Cut' here... go to 'Edit', 'Paste Into'... it goes inside, but you can only see the corner of it. Worse, it might even be tucked down here, and you'll never see it. And you can keep pasting into it, but it will never work. So just make sure that before you actually cut it... put it exactly where you want it to go, then cut and paste it. So, I said there was two ways, there's another way. With it selected... you can go to 'Edit', 'Place'. And you can go to 'Cafe'. And what will happen by default... is that it will paste inside of it, and that's fine. The problem is it's comes through as actual size... and it's a really big image. You see, it's that big, it's way bigger than our Spread. So it's just a little bit hard now to zoom out. And then to start scaling it. You have to be a, not a Pro, but it's a bit fiddly to do it that way. I find it's easier to do it separately. Get it to a planned position, cut and paste it inside. Before we go... last thing we'll do is get the text to run around here. So with it selected, 'Window'-- Actually I want you to do it by yourself. I want to see if you can get it going. I'm going to do it. 'Same as Clipping', this one here, I'm going to push this out. I said go and do it by yourself... I just totally did it in front of you. That's all right. We'll do another image, we'll replace this blue one... but we're going to look at something called Adobe Stock. And how that works. Let's go and do that now. 61. What is Adobe Stock?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at using Adobe Stock... where there are images already made... that you get to download, and use. Do they charge for them? Yes, they do. What are the prices? About US $10 to about $30... depending on the image. And the license you need. Let's see how they work in InDesign. The easiest way to load up Adobe Stock... is in the top right hand corner, it's right here. This little search bar for Adobe Stock. It's going to open up a website. If yours doesn't say Adobe Stock... see this little drop down here, it might be set to 'Adobe Help'. So move it to 'Adobe Stock'. And I want some plants and pots. And hit return, it's going to open up a web browser. Here he is. Now what you might find is that you might have to log in again. And you end up at that stage where you're like-- Hang is my Adobe password. Once you get through all that drama, you'll be logged in. And it's done a search for me. If you don't want to use that option in the top right... you can just go directly to stock.adobe.com Just type that in, and you'll end up here too. You'll still have to log in. Now what happens is, these are commercial images. It means that you've got to pay for them. You can pay for them separately, or you can do a monthly subscription. That's what I do. I use a slightly different account to do it. What you could do is you could start your 30 day trial. Get 10 free images. Just make sure you cancel before the end of those 30 days. These are just commercial use images. You find the quality is quite good on these. I'm going to decide on this one. Now what you do is, you got a couple of options. I clicked on it once. It opens up a few things. Now, here I can decide to buy, and license. And it will open it in InDesign. But that's going to cost me money. What I want to do is actually just get a preview and put it in there. So make sure you click on the 'Preview' option. Click on this one. And if you end up with an error like mine... that's why I have to use another account... because I studied in the UK, I moved to New Zealand. Now I've moved to Ireland... and my account is all kind of scrambled with different time zones and stuff. So if you have the same problem... click this drop down here, and say, save it to 'My Computer'. And you get to tell it where to go. Now I'm going to put it in your exercise files. Let's say you can't get this to work. I'm going to put it into '04 Long Document'. And it's called this one, ends in 25. Click 'Save', and it will be waiting in there for you. The cool thing about it is that in InDesign... if your account does work, unlike mine... it will end probably in this 'CC Library'. If it doesn't, the Green at Heart one, it's probably in one called... you probably only got a couple, it's probably in 'My Library'. And you just drag it out. So what I'm going to do though is just bring it in manually. 'File', 'Place', I've got this guy that ends in 25. And what I'm going to do is drag it out to roughly the right size. Do exactly what we did in the last exercise... where we pasted it inside of here. You'll notice there's a big watermark in the middle. That line will disappear once you pay for it. And I'm going to go to 'Cut'. 'Select' this guy, 'Edit', 'Paste Into'. I'm going to move it around. Ah, looks okay. Now what you can do is use watermark ones.. especially if you're not too sure on-- If you're not too sure the client would want it... there's no point paying for it... until you're ready to go. So you might mock up this whole document with watermark versions... and when the client says, "Yes, it's ready to go"... you'll have to let them know there's a cost involved. Now the images are worth between US $10 and $40... depending on things like sizes, and what kind of license you need. Just figure that aspect out before you send it to the client. Say, "Here's the design, but there's an additional $50 worth of images... that are part of this design." And say you got the go ahead, and you want to remove the watermarks... you can just download the Hi-res... and then switch them out using the relinking. But there's an option here that will be-- If you got to use the way that come down from the library... often you can just right click in here, and say 'License'... and it will do it directly for you, and update the image... download the Hi-res, build your account... and do all that stuff without you even asking. Pretty sweet. So that is CC Libraries, it's paid stuff. The budgets aren't high... but I know that lots of people I end up working with have zero budget. So we'll do that in the next video where we look at free stuff. Let's go and do that now. 62. Where can I find free images & icons that I can use for my business? : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at free images. By free, I mean commercial use, free. So you can use them for work and business. So this is the thing we looked at in the last video, called Adobe Stock. That costs around $10 to about $30... depending on the license you need. So let's look at free stuff, where there's no budget. So Freeimages is probably one of the most popular. freeimages, with a 's', dot com. In here I'm going to type in 'Flowers'. And you'll find a lot of good quality images. Now when you're using this site, you need to ignore all of these images... because these are paid ones, they kind of come up over here as ads. That's how the site makes its money. And what you need to do over this side-- 'Relevancy' is fine, it's going to be good images... but I find I get better quality results if I get 'Most Downloaded'. It brings the ones to the top that have been downloaded the most. And I often find the quality can be better. In this case, maybe it's not as great... but trust me, you'll find... switching it from 'Relevancy' to 'Most Downloaded' often works. And what you want to do is-- Now, one of the things is that... all the images size are a little bit different. Say you want this one here, you click on it... you'll see that it is a certain size. You can't get a massive one sometimes... sometimes they're a little bit smaller. You could download. You're going to have to sign up, it's free. You can see it is 1200 pixels across, not huge. But sign in and download, it's free to sign up. And that's a good place for free images. There's another place you could go, let's go to Google. And let's type in 'Roses'. Let's go to 'Images'. Now you just can't pick any of these images. Why? Because you don't have a license to use them... but there is an option in here... to search by images that have licenses to use commercially. And it's under 'Settings', you can see-- No, not under 'Settings', go to 'Tools'... So I clicked on 'Images', clicked on 'Tools'... and this says 'Usage Rights'... and I can say, 'Labeled for reuse', or 'Reuse with modification'. This means that I can use it as it is. This means I can use it, but also go and doctor it... in something like Photoshop. These ones here can be used if you're a non commercial user. So, maybe education or news. But more than likely, you probably only got one for commercial use... and I'm going to go to 'Labeled for reuse'. You'll find there's good quality stuff in here. What you also might do, is go to, where it says 'Size'... and say, "I want the large ones." Because I don't want to deal with low quality stuff. So, freeimages, or using Google Images to get commercial use stuff. Now let's move on to Icons. Now icons, there is a lot online, of free stuff. Most of it is kind of junky clip art from the 90s. But I like this site here called Iconfinder. Because, let's say I need an icon for a leaf... And what I can do is... make sure I'm over the side here. By default, it doesn't have any of these things turned on. It's just because I've been working on this before. So I'm going to try and go back to how it is by default. So this is what it looks like, there's lots of them here. Now, if you do want to pay for an icon... totally, help this site out, you can see the $ on an icon, that's fine. But let's say you're doing it on a super budget, let's go to 'Free'. And where it says 'License type'... you want to pick this one here for commercial use, but with 'No back link'. This one here says 'Commercial use'... but you have to add a link to the site somewhere in your document... to say that that's where it came from, so I'm going to go to 'No back link'. And these are the little icons that I get to use for free commercial use. It's not as many. There's different things. If I put in the word 'Home', I need a 'Home' icon... same commercial use, say it needs to be 'Any', it doesn't have to be 'Vector'. There is a lot to pick from. What I really like about Iconfinder... is that often they're part of groups. Let's say that I decide-- Let's say that I really like this icon here. I know I'm just picking randomly. That one. Terrible one. You can see, that's actually part of another group of icons. So probably not that great. Let's look at this one. Another terrible one... but you can see it's a group of other free to use commercial fonts. Commercial icons. So it means that, often if you're looking for one icon... you'll need a group of them. So that my friends is free images, and free icons. Let's move on to the next video. 63. How do I add bullets and numbered lists in Adobe InDesign?: In this video we're going to look at how to do bullets in InDesign... or maybe numbering. It's going to be the quickest video I've ever made. Let's go and do that now. First thing we're going to do is... find where, in our notes, we've got bullet points. I know that on my page 11... we're looking for the title 'Towards a more diverse workplace". And it's this list here that I've put in there. Virtually mine's ended up like, in a really awkward position to show you. So I'm just going to put in a few returns. Just so that it's not confusing during the text wrap. So, I'm going to select all these guys. Bullets are nice and easy, make sure you're on "Paragraph'... and then click 'Bullets'. If you want numbers, click 'Numbers'. Super duper simple. All right, next video. 64. How can I create a table inside Adobe InDesign?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Tables in InDesign. Now we're going to make this table here... with little lines, and style it a little bit. We're also going to add ugly alternating rows, just to prove we can. Maybe make it a little easier to understand for large tables. All right, let's get going. First of all, we're going to put in our table. Mine's on page 12, we're looking for profitability. I don't really mind where it goes. So we're going to put our cursor in here, put a 'return' in. And it's going to go right here. Next step, go up to 'Table', 'Insert Table'. In this case we're going to have '5' and '2'. It's kind of remembered that from the last time I did this... when I was preparing for this example. Yours probably is going to say '3' and '3' by default. But '5' and '2' is going to work for us in this case. We're not going to use 'Header Rows' and 'Footer Rows'. Though that would look complicated and really good... when you're doing tables that may be crossing over lots of pages. So pages and pages of a big table. We'll look at that in our advanced InDesign course, but for the moment... 99 times out of a 100, you're just going to use 'Body Rows' and 'Columns'. We're going to fake it in, don't get me wrong... but we don't want to use these specialized Header and Rows. Let's click 'OK'. And nicely it kind of fits in where we need it to be. If you're creating one that's not part of the Text Box... I'm going to go down to the blank box, blank page down the end here somewhere. And just go, but nothing selected... go to 'Table', 'Create Table'. And again I can just click 'OK'... and then I can drag it out to any size I need. It's up to you how you get it created... but I'm going to jump up to page 12. That little shortcut there was 'Command J', or 'Control J' on a PC. And I typed in '12', and hit 'return'. I call myself doing shortcuts. So what we're going to do is just some basic stuff. This first column here, I want to join, so I'm going to select these two. And along the top here, we get some basic table options. Now what I want to do is, this one little icon here... it's got a little cross between, that's called "Merge Cells'. I'm going to select both of these two. I'm going to just drag across them, and click 'Merge Cells'. And this is going to be our '2019 Turnover'. I'll put in US$. Let's go and add some details here. So that might have been painfully slow when you're watching it on fast mode. Took me ages to type that in, not sure why. But what we want to do, a couple of things. I want to align this, because it doesn't have to be as long a column... all these quarters. But I want this to be a bit bigger. So you can click, hold, and drag it. I have to be using my Type Tool to do these amends. So I'm going to drag this across. And then what I'm going to do is drag this side across... so it kind of aligns up to the column again. Now to do the styling, I'm going to quickly select it all... and pick my paragraph styles. So I'm going to 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'... and I'll pick 'Body Copy' to get started. I'll highlight this one here, and I'm just going to go through... and pick 'Roboto Bold', and I'll go to 'Color'. Next thing I want to do is play around with these lines. I just want the horizontal lines. One's going left to right. And I want to get rid of these tall ones... and the ones at the top and the bottom. I just want to kind of align through the middle, to help read it. To make it look a little nicer. So now we're going to work with the borders around the tables... and guess what. It's not that easy, it's a little bit fiddly, these border bits. So I'm going to select all of these, you can use your Type Tool... and just click and drag across all of these... or you can click anywhere. See this little arrow just appears, you just click that. What we need to do now is either save this version, or-- That's quite small, and hard to use. This one is big, and hard to use. I'm going to use the 'Stroke Panel' one. You can use this tiny one up the top here. What I need to do is, I need to first of all activate all the lines... by making them all go blue. Because by default, it's just at the tops, bottoms, lefts, and rights. I want these ones in the middle as well. I got them all. It's leaning in, really close to the screen to see. I figure I've got them all, and I'm going to say I like them all-- You've done nothing now, you've just highlighted them to say-- The next thing I'm going to do is going to apply it to... all the blue bits that I've got selected. I'm going to say I'd like them all to be '0 points'. Now if I click in here... they all have no lines around their outside. They're a little bit weird, because we're in working mode... so it gives this kind of blue hint. That's not actually there when it prints. If I go to the 'Black Selection Tool'... hit 'W', you'll see they're not actually there. They're just there as a visual guide. Next thing I'd like to do - Select them all again. - is I'm going to say... I want just to add a fakeness to the lines going through left and right. So it's just these middle ones here. So I'm going to have to try and lean, then close again. Turn all the blue lines off, just... Oh, so close, not clicking. Just this one here. So just this one going through the middle, not the outside one. Just the middle one, I'd like to give it a 'Stroke' of say half a point. And I'd like that 'Stroke', over here, to be a color of... I'll use the green. Dark green? Mid green. Now let's look at it. Click off, hit 'W'. You've got lines through the middle only. Now if you need to work on just one cell... let's say you need to-- This is like the total ?? You need to do a select all, 'Command A', no you don't. You just kind of drag across it all... until eventually you get the whole cell. So with the whole thing, just keep dragging... go down a little bit, and you grab the whole cell. And now I can say things like-- Can you see, I've just got the one side selected. So now I could say, actually I want to give it a weight of '2 pt'. I want to make it all red, because this is the total. It's looking a little horrible, but you get the idea, right? So you can select the whole thing, do the whole thing. Do little bits, I'm going to click 'undo', get rid of that. One thing you might do in tables... is play around with one of the styles. So let's select it all again. The little arrow in the corner, it's a bit harder to see. I'll turn 'W' back on... so we can see the edges. Grab it all, go up to 'Table'. Let's go to 'Table Options', and we're going to do this 'Alternating Fills'. This can be kind of handy. Our table's pretty easy to understand... but you might do this, where you go to 'Alternating fills'. 'Alternating Pattern' is going to be 'Every Other Row'. Turn preview on, you can kind of see in the background what it's doing. It's going to say the first row is 'Black', and the second row is 'None'. I'm going to click 'OK', and it just means that's going to happen. So every alternating row is going to be this dark. It's going to be black, but it's set to a tint. Let's have a look again. Let's go to 'Table', 'Table Options', 'Alternating Fills'. Preview is on, you see it's set to 'Black' and '20%'. What I might do actually is just set it to 'Yellow'. And turn it to '100%' so it's not so wishy washy. And you can also say I'd like to 'Skip First Row'... because I like that white. Let's click 'OK', where we've got our table. ?? before, just the lines... but I would like Alternating Fills as well. That's how to create and style our own table. Let's look in the next video... how to bring in something from Word or Excel. 65. How do I convert tables from Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel into Adobe InDesign? : So that we don't mess up our lovely long document... we're going to do this exercise in a new document, just a blank one. Just to keep it separate. Because we need lots of versions of it... and we got not a lot of space to do it in the other document. So, what I need to do is, show you the different ways... that you can bring in tables into Word. Most of the times they'll come through, and just be fine. So if I go to 'File', 'Place'. We'll use 'Table Example Word 1'. Make sure you're doing it from Word first, click 'Open'. And we'll click and drag it out... and the table was perfect in Word... so it's come through perfect in InDesign. So no real drama's there. Where the dramas do happen... if I go to 'File', 'Place' now, and bring in the example of Word 2... and I drag this out, this can happen. And it still looks fine, but it's not a table, it's been done with tabs. So there's no actual tables to put the lines through. It's actually just, people have gone through... gone to here, and hit tab to separate them out. That's fine, but formatting becomes a little bit hard... because it's not a table. It's easy to adjust with table. Select all the bits you want to be in a table. So I've just highlighted them all. Go to 'Table', 'Convert Text to Table'. By default it's using the Column Separator as the 'Tab'. You might have commas, or something else, I'm going to click 'OK'. And hey presto, it's a table... I might have to do some adjustments, just to tidy that in. That needs to be a little bit smaller... and that needs to be a bit bigger. So you can mess around with it like we did in the previous example. So, I'm going to put him over here. Another example that might come through from Word... is either the table's not set up right in Word... and it comes through a bit weird... or you copy, and paste it, so I'm going to open up that example. So this is my 'Table Example Word 2', I'm just going to copy it... and paste it in, this happens. So the tab's there, but InDesign hasn't converted them nicely. It works just the same as the last example. Select everything that you want to be part of this table... go to 'Table', 'Convert Text to Table', it's the same. The tab is separating them, and it comes back to looking good again. We can go through and play with the lines between them... and the style formatting like we did in the previous exercise. Last one we'll do is - I'm just going to move him off to the side. - is getting it from Excel. Same process as Word. 'File', 'Place', and there's one in here called 'Table Example Excel 1'. I'm going to click and drag it out. And it comes through with the same kind of problem. This is our Excel file, you need a course in Excel... I've got one, I've also got one in Word as well, if you want to check that out. I'm going to select all of these. So this is what happens when you place from Excel. It does this kind of weird tab thing as well. But I can fix it just like I did with Word. 'Convert Text to Table', and we're away again. The nice thing about Excel though is... let's say it's a monthly thing. It's a revenue report, or sales report, or something... you go through, and you format it... and you spend ages making it look nice. We'll do a little bit of formatting. We'll do 'Alternating Fills'. Every other row, skip the first row even. So we've got this, and we've done some formatting to it. Terrible formatting, I know. But let's say, when I update it now, instead of importing it... and then saving table styles, and all sorts of advanced stuff... you can just jump to Excel... and let's say this is the data for another month... or just been adjusted, or-- Let's say it was a financial data, changing every month. Instead of having to go and re-import it, and style it... just select all the bits you want to change. Hit 'Copy', so 'Edit', 'Copy' in Excel. Then jump into InDesign, and what you're going to do is select the whole table. Or select everything you've copied. If you're only going to select the whole table, and hit 'Paste'... and you'll notice that it goes from height, and just adjusts... but it also retains all the style that we've done. So any changes that get made, you can go and adjust. Now, this is true if it's just one file. So say you've got red here-- I'm going to go through, and it's all red. I can select this whole column, so 'Color' all the way down, click 'Copy'. Go to InDesign, click in this, there's a little arrow at the top here. To get that whole column, hit 'Paste'. As long as these match up... we're copying and pasting, and it will update, and retain the InDesign styles. Super awesome. All right, so that is a few different ways to work with tables... when coming from different Microsoft platforms. Let's move on to the next video. 66. How do I get images to move with the text in Adobe InDesign?: In this video we're going to do something called Anchored Objects. Some programmers call it Inline Graphic. Just means that, like in Microsoft Word, when I hit return... can you see, the image comes along to the right... whereas all the other images we've done so far... has just kind of set there, and done not a lot. So, let's go and learn how to do that in InDesign now. So to place an Inline Object, or an Anchored Object... let's make sure we've got nothing selected. So 'Black Arrow', click in the background, let's go to 'File', 'Place'. And let's bring in 'Anchored Object 1. illustrator'. And what we're going to do is just click, hold, and drag it... so it kind of matches the same size as one of these columns. IF yours doesn't work out that well... grab the 'Black Arrow', and just remember, hold down 'Command Shift'... or 'Control Shift' on the PC. And we can drag it so it's perfectly lined up as... just the way to this column. Now what I'm going to do is go to 'Edit', 'Cut'. I'm going to put mine in between this paragraph here. So I'll just put a 'return' in. And most of the time, 70% of the time I do this... all I have to do is go to 'Edit', 'Paste', and it works just fine. In my case - I'm going to 'undo' that. - it's that I've set the Leading for all of these paragraphs here. Most of the times nobody changes that, so there's no problem. You just cut, paste, and it works great. Because I too have set mine to '13', not 'automatic'... what I have to do is, with my cursor flashing where it is-- Before I go 'Edit', 'Paste', let's just switch this back to 'Auto' - So that's my Leading under 'Character'. - then go to 'Edit', 'Paste', and it works just fine. You can see, it's pushed a gap for itself... and if I hit 'return's up here... flows along in the text. So normally, just go to 'File', 'Paste'. If you're like me, and you play around with the Leading... you might have to switch it back to 'Auto' before you hit 'Paste'. So let's do it a couple of times. I've got one there. It should obviously be lined up with the text... but because I'm using dummy text, it doesn't really matter. Remember, 'return' in, and I'm going to set this to 'Auto'. Actually, first of all I need to bring in my image. So the second image is going to be 'File', 'Place'... bring in 'Anchored Object 2'. Drag it out to be roughly the right size. Remember, 'Edit', 'Cut', you can use shortcuts. And in here, we've set our Leading back to 'Auto'. Hit 'Paste'. Great. I would like you, my friend... to do the last one by yourself. There's one more to bring, so go through and do it. You've done them all. Actually, what am I talking about? Do it on your own though, see if you can make it work. I'll wait here while you do it, but this is a video. So I'm going to put in the last one myself as well, 'File', 'Place'. And bring in 'Anchored Object 3'. I've placed mine directly into it. Why? Just because I wasn't paying attention. The only trouble with this is you have to now go and resize it... while it's in the text box, and sometimes it can be really big. And it just makes life a little hard. So, often what I do is, remember, drag it out first. Not part of the text. Cut it. Get my cursor flashing in here. Make sure it's switched to 'Auto', and hit 'Paste', or just type in a 'V'. Not the most fluid of my tutorials... but you get the idea, we're working around with images... that rank it, that flow along with the text. That will be it for this video, let's get on to the next one. 67. How do I create a Line Break, Column Breaks & Page Breaks in Adobe InDesign?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... doing Page Breaks and Column Breaks. We do them just so that-- things like this, you can see this heading here... very close to the bottom, I'd like to just actually push it to the next page. Further on, there's probably some worse ones, let's have a look. Almost a big gap there. Say this one here, definitely it needs to be pushed across... but when obviously when you start, as earlier on as we can... because if we push this one along... it's going to cascade down, and everything's going to move along. Heading might be a perfect place then. So let's start with this one, I'm on these three lines here... and you could probably live with it. I want it to push to the next page. I got my cursor just in front of the word Legacy. You'll see it flashing there, I'm going to go up to 'Type'... and down here, where it says 'Insert Break Character'. There's 'Column Break' and 'Page Break'. 'Page Break' is going to push this to the very next page... and that's not what we want in this case. Move on to pop along to the next column here, not the next page. There's obviously used cases for both. So we're going to go 'Column Break'... and you'll just notice that he now... is on the top of the next column. This guy here, is kind of a flow on effect... where I want you now to go and say 'Type'. 'Insert Break Character', and go to 'Column Break'. Now how do I like these all? These all are looking all right. One thing you'll notice before you move on, this Paragraph Line is appearing. It's because they're just like a Break Character here... but it's got our Paragraph Style applied to it. That's weird, right? You can have a Column Break Character... that does have that applied to it. So what we'll do is... you can either select it, like I have. Just select this little bit, change the Paragraph Style... or, just after this full stop here, I'm going to hit 'Delete' key... because what's happening is-- Let's have a look at 'Type'. Let's go to 'Show Hidden Characters'. See that? That little character there. That is the Column Break. So what we're going to do is-- And it's got a Subheading Paragraph Style applied to it. I'm going to go 'Delete' key... and there he is right there. Still having its own line, with a Paragraph Style applied. You can also see here, I got this guy. He's called an orphan, or widow, can never remember which one. But he's being pushed all by himself... and he's a big old lonely guy at the end of this one. That looks a bit wrong. So I could put in some Column Break just to push that along... but actually it's easier probably just to grab this... and push this along a little bit... until I'm kind of happy. I'm just kind of pushing it to the left... till a couple of lines appear... because that makes no difference to my design, I feel. It still looks fine, kind of hang in there... or you could do the opposite, and bring it in that way. So that it's not pushed to one side. Now, with the Column Breaks, and Line Breaks-- We're doing this quite late in the tutorial... it's because it's one of the last things you want to do. You do not want to be doing this earlier on... because if you make any text changes... these Column Breaks are not going to make any sense. If I go and add a bit of copy at the top here... everything is going to be offline again. So it's kind of the last thing I do, it's just check, check. I added some space in here earlier on in this tutorial. Get rid of him, clean him up. Everything's looking okay. Down, down, down. I'm going to give up now. They all look pretty good. Remember, we didn't bother with too many things later on. So that is a Column Break, Page Break's the same. In the same place, but it will obviously push it to the next page. One thing we'll do just to tidy up things before we leave... is that I forgot this page here. I'm going to click on him, select everything on this page. I want it to actually be on this page here. I just got it on the wrong page. So I'm going to go to 'Edit', 'Cut'. So I've cut it all, then I'm going to... double click on the page I want it, page 4. Now we go to 'Edit', and there's one-- I could just hit 'Paste', and that puts in the middle of the 'Spread'... which is not cool. I want to go to 'Edit', and there's one called 'Paste in Place'. Nice. All these we'll make slightly different later on when we do the Contents page. But that's why I want that image. alright gang, that is Page Breaks and Column Breaks in InDesign. 68. How do I make an automatic table of contents in Adobe InDesign?: Hi there, in this video we're going to make a Table of Contents like this... but we're going to do it automatically, where it pulls all the titles... that we've used through our documents... and automatically adds them to this list with the correct number... and Styles it automatically. All right, let's go and learn how to do that. First thing is, I'm going to jump to page 3. That's where I'm going to put my Table of Contents, double click it. Zoom in a little bit. And I need to go to 'Layout', 'Table of Contents'. Now the one thing that makes Table of Contents... especially this automatic one work... is the use of Paragraph Styles. So during this tutorial, we've gone through and applied... this thing called Subheading to all of the Headings. The cool thing about it is, if I add it to this... it's going to add it to my Table of Contents. If I leave it just like this, click 'OK', drag it out... you'll see that all my headings, the Chief Executive Review... Tracking Our Progress... you can see here, Executive Review, Tracking Our Progress... it's all been included in the Table of Contents. So, one thing I want to do though - I'm going to 'Edit', 'Undo', 'Edit', 'Undo' - is apply Styles while I'm doing it. So 'Layout', 'Table of Contents'. I want my Subheading to be added. Click it across. Now this is the Title. It's just that words that go over the top. I'm going to call it Table of Contents. And the Style it's going to have... we'll give it the 'TOC Title'. Can you see, these are the headings that I've made... but now there's this magical new one called TOC. Table of Contents Title. This is one that InDesign's going to generate for us, that we can update. Same thing goes for the actual contents of our Table of Contents. If I leave it, we saw that it had the same Styles as our Headings. Instead of same Style... I'm going to click on this new one, 'TOC Body Copy'. Brand new, made for us for InDesign. We can adjust the Styling afterwards. Cool. Let's click 'OK'. Same thing, I'm going to click, hold, and drag it out. And we've got our Table of Contents. So if you don't have any Paragraph Styles... you either have to manually type it all out, copy and paste... and try and work out what the page numbers are. That's the manual way... or you're going to have to go through, create a Paragraph Style... and go through and apply it to all the headings. Then you can do it automatically like we have here. Let's look at our Styles panel. Go to 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. So two new ones have been generated. We've got TOC Title and TOC Body Copy. So that one, TOC Title, controls the contents. And TOC Body Text controls all of this. It's a pretty ugly looking Paragraph Style... so we're going to go and adjust it. So, Table of Contents, this TOC Style. I'm going to go through and say, actually I'm going to use my 'Roboto'. I'll use the 'Slab Bold'. I'm going to make sure it's 'left aligned'. I'm going to use 'red'. And you can see, like we did earlier... we're going to right click it and say 'Redefine Style'. The reason we do that is because... if we update the Table of Contents, it reverts to its original Style. So if we don't redefine the Style, like this one here... say we go and make some changes just quickly, and I'll make it smaller. I'm going to pick Arial. We do all this, and then we have to go through this bit that says 'Layout'... and it says 'Update Table of Contents'. We've moved things from different pages. If I click 'Update'... you can see, it updates it great... but it also reverts it back to the ugly looking Paragraph Style. So, let's select it. Let's make it 'Roboto Medium'. I'm going to change it to '10'. I'm going to increase the Leading a bit. So before I move on, I need to right click, and say 'Redefine Style'. Now what we can do is, we can go through and say... Say this is just a text change... it's called Chief Executive's Review. Now it's Chief Executive's Rant. And if I come up to here, you will notice it's not dynamic. It doesn't update automatically... but I can manually go and say 'Layout', and go to 'Update Table of Contents'. And it's updated it to Rant. And it's given this lovely new Paragraph Style. So we've gone through, and adjusted it... even if we change numbers... so this one here, say in front of this one I put a Column Break. So 'Type', 'Insert Special Characters'. No, 'Insert Break Character', and go to 'Column Break'. The Tracking our Progress is now on page 6. Up here, where are you? There you are. We need to go, so it's on 5, just go up to 'Layout'. Actually you have to click inside of it. So grab the Type Tool, click inside, 'Layout'. 'Update Table of Contents', you'll see, it adjusts. And all the ones after it have adjusted as well. Next thing we're going to do, and the thing I've been ignoring... is these weird numbers that are real jammed up to the side. So we're going to learn Tabs in the next video. And that will help us fix that. 69. How do you change the tabs in Adobe InDesign?: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Tabs. And in our case, there's Tabs in here... but we want them to go from this to this. We're also going to add Leader Dots as well. So let's go and do that now in this tutorial. To make Tabs work, first thing you need to do... If you've zoomed in, and you can't see the top... see there's the top of my Text Box, if I can't see that... it's going to go a little bit wrong, so I'm going to go up to 'Type', 'Tabs'. I love InDesign, I am a fan boy of InDesign. Tabs is probably the hardest thing to use in here... and probably not really greatly implemented. I like the way Word do it, where it just ties it into this, along the top. Anyway, 'Type', hit 'Tabs'. Because I can't see the top of that box, watch what happens. It just randomly appears in the middle of the page. It's not actually connected to the Type Box, you can... you can see here, I scroll up a little bit, so I can see it. And you can hit this magnetic button here, and it will stick to the top. So just make sure you can see the top of the box... otherwise it can be really troublesome. What I'd like to do is, with my Type Tool... I'm going to highlight all of the bits that I want to work with. Now, there is actually a Tab in between these. That's what the Table of Contents does for us. Can you see, it's kind of lining up... but there's not enough room, so we're going to put the Tab way up here. So I've highlighted it all, I've gone to my magnetic buttons so it lines up. And all you need to do is click in this slightly lighted gray area. It's a little bit difficult to explain... but you can see my arrows wriggling back and forth. I want to click in there once. And you can see that all are lined up. You can move it around, click and drag it a little bit. That's not in the right place. One thing you might find is... accidentally, if you don't click exactly on that tiny little blue arrow... and you click just here, you can see, you get two of them. You're not playing around with two of them. If you want to get rid of one, just click on it... hit 'delete' on your keyboard. 'Undo' that, don't do that. Click, hold, and drag it off, and it will disappear. The next thing we need to do is... I want to mess around with, say the-- It's a little bit hard because these numbers are so far away. I want to add some dots like we saw at the beginning of this video. They're called Leader Dots. And what you do is, you highlight all of our text that we have. You need to make sure that the Tab you're working with is highlighted. Mine is not, click on this, goes blue. Then where it says 'Leader', you put in a full stop, or period, hit 'Enter'. And you got these Leader Dots that rush across the page... to join up the number. You can have other things, I can put in an underscore. Now I find this to be a little bit troublesome. I'm the Pro, and I still can't make it work. Now I think this might be just my version, I hope that is. I'm hoping you just delete this period... and type in an underscore. What's happening for me is it's deleting all my text. Why is that happening? I'm not quite sure. I've played around with this a couple of times, and it's still doing it. I'm sure, with the next fix it will be fine. Let's try it one more time, I'm going to close down the Tabs. I'm leaving this in here, because Tabs are a little bit fiddly... and at the moment they are extra bit fiddly. So if you find them quite troublesome, it's not you, it's InDesign. 'Type', 'Tabs', back open, click on that guy there. Select them all in, grab you. Make sure he's selected. Go to Leader, I'm going to change it for an underscore '_', hit 'return'... and it's working. You might just close it, go back in. I've used an underscore, so you can see, just a line joining them all. It's up to you, what you'd like to do. I'm going to select them all. Turn it back into a Leader Dot. And it worked, perfect. You can actually have anything. You can type anything in there, of course. So underscores, hyphens, anything you want to join those up. Last thing to do before we leave tabs is - close this guy down. - we've actually changed the Paragraph Style here. And I would kind of have to change the font... but we've added these Leader Dots, and we've played with Tabs... and that's all included in the Paragraph Style. Like in the last video, we looked at... whenever you change it, you need to update the TOC Body. So let's go and open up 'Windows', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. And what we'll do is, highlight it all... right click 'TOC'. You got to right click it. And go to 'Redefine Style'. That means that if I update my Table of Contents... it's going to add these Leader Dots back in... and the Tab, otherwise it will reset back to where it was on the left. All right, that's going to be it for Tabs. 70. Can i change the numbering of my pages so 1 starts later in the InDesign file? : In this video we're going to look at starting your page numbering... not from 1, you can see, we started A, B, C, D... and 1 actually starts on page 5. That means we can have a Contents page, and a Cover... that don't get included in the page number. That's going to help us with a couple of things, like our Contents page. Otherwise our first bit of text is going to start on page 5. That's not true, it's on 1. It's kind of true. Anyway, let's go and look at setting out our page numbers. First thing we need to do, is we need to jump to page 1. So double click page 1, so we know we're on it. Right click page no.1, and we need to go to this option... that says 'Numbering & Section Options'. Click on him. And what we do is, we say, I want to switch it from style 1, 2, 3... to A, B, C. Actually you pick any of these in here. It's really typical to use A, B, C. But you can use any of these other numbers, just click 'OK'. You'll notice that A, B, C, D, E is being replaced out. Now what we want to do is go to our first page that we want. In our case it's E. So I don't want this. Let's get rid of our Spreads. I don't want page 1, page C, or B. I don't want this to be page1, I want this to be page 1. So I'm going to double click page E. Right click it, go to 'Numbering & Sectioning'. And just say, I'd like to start at page no. 1... using this format. Click 'OK'. What will happen is, you can see, page 1 starts here... 2, 3, 4. You see, the numbering starts here as well. All the way through, to the end of our document. One of the last things we need to do is our Table of Contents. We did this earlier, where we had different page numbering. So, all we need to do now is... because we've redefined all our Styles, and we're doing it all proper... now if we go to 'Layout'-- I've got my cursor flashing in here, first of all... go to 'Layout', let's go to 'Update Table of Contents'. And I'm going to click 'OK'. There's some spaces left in the front of this... when I was messing around with it before, yours should be fine. So it's updated to the correct numbers. One thing I also did was I went in and adjusted the font... from Medium to Light... because I just liked it. I did that in between tutorials. And what all did I forget to do? I forgot to go to 'Styles'... 'Paragraph Styles'... and I went, right click 'Redefine'... because I've reverted to what it was before. So that's page numbering, we used A, B, C, D at the beginning. And we're going to use 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 for the rest of it. The only trouble happens, is when you go 'File', 'Print' now... and you're like, "Hmm." "I want to print pages."... and you're not too sure. So what I have to do is go to A, through to 30. So it will include A, B, C, D, E... and all the way through the numbers. What if I just need A, B... or if I just print 1-30? It's going to skip out these first pages. That's just something to be aware of when you're printing, or making PDFs... that the page numbering is a little bit stranger... now that we've gone and messed around with the page numbering. All right, that's going to be it for our long document project. We're going to go and mock it up now to use in our portfolio. We're going to look at that, and then move on to some Data Merge. That sounds cool, doesn't it? Let's go do that. 71. How do I combine Microsoft Excel spreadsheet in InDesign?: In this video we're going to take this out of Excel file... with all this data in it... And then make it work in InDesign by creating these place holders. First Name, Last Name, Company. And then generating a file... that has loads of people's names in it. You can see here, many hundreds. So let's go and do that now in InDesign. The first thing we need to do is we're going to create our Swing Tag. So we'll go to 'File', 'New', 'Document'. Now best thing to do for size is to go down to your local stationery store... and just figure out what the plastic sleeve they go into, the size of text. I'm pretty sure they all use inches, even if you're not in America. 4" x 3", but go and check, just to make sure. Sometimes the business card sizes, just to take business cards. But we're going to use the 4" x 3" And in terms of this one, we're going to set the Margins to '0'... just because I actually don't need them for this case. And in terms of Bleed, we'll use an eighth of an inch, so '0.125'. Or 3mm all around. I'm going to grab my Rectangle tool. I'm going to draw a rectangle that covers this bottom bit. That's where the company name's going to go. And I'm going to fill up with Red. It's all part of that, because it's a new document... so I'm going to have to click over here. I'll make it a little bit smaller. The next thing I want to do actually is bring in my Logo. 'File', 'Place', in your '05 Data Merge'... there's one called 'Green Logo'. Bring him in. And get him about there. 'W'. So now we need to connect the Excel file. The trouble is, Excel won't actually connect directly. So weirdly you'll have to open your Excel file in Excel... which is not weird, I guess. We're going to start with this one here, 'Garden Awards Attendees'. And that's what this file looks like. You can see, there's lots and lots of data in this one. But the xls or the sls won't work. You just need to open it up in Excel, or Google docs... whatever you can to open it up. And go to 'File', and just do a 'Save As'. So instead of 'xlss', we're going to drop that down... and go to this one that says 'csv'. That's the one that InDesign can accept. Don't need to change anything else, hit 'Save'. I already done it for us in our examples. So if I connect it now, it's going to connect to the csv... but not the Excel file. Let's open up 'Data Merge' panel. Let's go to 'Window', 'Utilities', 'Data Merge'. And it kind of tells you what to do here... but the first one is the Nav sandwich here. And we're going to click on 'Select Data Source'. Remember, you can see these ones are grayed out... it won't work for these, I'm in '05 Data Merge'. And we're going to work with the 'Garden Awards Attendees'. And you'll see that, if I jump back into Excel... you can see it's brought through the Heading names, or the Column names. So if you don't have these, go into your files and just add them to it. It's going to make life easier working in InDesign. You might have to insert a row, just type him in. You'll have to use all of these. I want First and Last Name, I don't want the Entry Fee... I don't want their email address, or the Entry Date. I want the Company name. So you can decide on what you want to have. I'm going to move that off to the side, I'm going to grab the Type Tool. And I'm going to draw a nice big Type Box. And all I need to do is, with my cursor flashing... I'm going to click on 'First Name'. Put a 'return' in, and put in 'Last Name'. I'm going to style these now... to look like it did in the earlier part of this video. I'm going to move them, so they're kind of centered. I'm going to highlight these guys, and make them centered. They're both going to be 'Roboto'. So let's go 'Roboto'. It's going to be 'Bold'. I'm going to increase-- This one here, I'm going to max up the size. How big? You'll have to look at your names list... and see how many characters that person has. If you got somebody with a really big name... you might have to have slightly smaller font. We can test it, it's easy enough. Select it all, I'm going to make it green color. This guy here is going to be the 'Light' version. Now I'm just messing around, designing. Now it's hard to work with this First and Last Name. So what we can do is, see it says 'Preview' in the corner... it will pull through only the first entry from your database list. So Robyn Ward, not very long, so it's going to fit just fine. I'm going to select it all, and make it a bit bigger. You can cycle through, see this arrow. I'm going to go through, Robyn Ward, Mark Rose. Lyty, Sergio. We got lots of names, and none of them are very long. So this is going to work out just fine. Now this is not actually done, this is just previewing. You can turn it on and off. But it's not meant to be the finished one. There's a last part to this to export it. This is just kind of previewing it through. There's one more thing I need to do, it's my Company Name. So I got nothing selected, grab the Type Tool. Drag out a box, and I'm going to click in 'Company'. I'm going to do the same thing, I'm going to center it, grab it. The Company Names get quite long... so I'm going to have it so it's all the way across. I'll use the Eyedropper tool, like we did earlier. I'm going to grab all this. Grab my Eyedropper Tool, steal that one. This time I got the 'Roboto Thin'. Make it a bit smaller, maybe make the font 'Paper'. Hit 'Preview'. You can see, some of these business names are a lot longer. So I probably have to go smaller on the font. Select all this. Little smaller, so it all fits in. You might have to do a print as well... because this is printing at '13 pts'. It's not very tiny, but it might be a little too thin to read. So I'm going to go up to 'Regular'. So let's have a look through a few of these. They look like they're all going to fit. So that is how you connect the two up. The next thing I want to do is export this thing. First of all I'm going to save it. And let's call this one, in 'Desktop', 'InDesign Class Files'... this one is going to be called 'Green at Heart Awards Night'. 'Tags' I'm going to call this one 'V1'. So this here is-- To save it, I need to turn this off. This here is like the template. You're going to end up with two files. You got this one, plus the ones you generated with all the names in it. And you can click this little icon here, 'Create Merged Document'. Click on this. There's a few different options. We're just going to leave it all as standard... because that's probably what you're going to need to do. Let's click 'Create'. What happens is, we've got-- I've got two files open at the moment... but it's generated a third. A nice little thing that appears here... "No over-set text were generated." Over-set text is that little red cross in the corner... that says the text couldn't fit. This can be good, say you're doing business cards, and it's for-- I've done jobs for 10,000 people... at a big electrical company... and you hit that button, and you don't want to have to go... and double check 2000 names, or 10,000 names... to see if any of the names are too long and won't fit. This is just telling you, "Don't worry, all is cool." The difference between this one, which is my template... which has got First and Last Name, like place holders... and the second one is the naming. Can you see here, it's called 'V1', it's got hyphen 1... it's not like super clear... but if I save this one now... Instead of hyphen 1, I might give it a better name. I might call this one-- Can't think of a better name. Don't call it Final. Remember, that will kill this job. We need to call it... I'm calling it Output because I can't think of a better name at the moment. Maybe it's easy just to call the first one Template... and the next one Not Template. So it's saved, and what we can do is look at the Pages panel. Mine has disappeared. 'Window', let's go to 'Pages'. And I drag it back in here. I know why, I dragged that out. I was using it for a different project while I was making these tutorials. As you can see, I have a page 1... page 2, page 3, can you see all these names here? It's made a document with all of these. So if I'm printing in the office, I can have print. What is it? A hundred different names. Or I can send this to the printer now, to get printed. And hopefully get trimmed up, and then sent back to me... so I can put them into that little clear name sleeves... at the welcome desk, when people arrive. I got my heart set on this Gala Night now... even though I've totally just made this thing up. Anyway, I'm sure it would be a great night. That my friends, is Data Merge. 72. CLASS EXERCISE: Create your own business card.: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at doing a class exercise. So, it is based on learning the technique of Data Merge. But I would also like you to learn a little bit of duplicate creativity. So if you're new to InDesign, this might be an opportunity... to have something for your portfolio. So I'd like you to go through... and research ideas for business card layouts. So you might look at Behance, or Pinterest, or Nice. There's an earlier tutorial on that, on inspiration for design. I'd like you to lay something out for it. There's logos in the exercise folder. You can use any of the images... that we've used through this whole tutorial, if you want to use an image. But I'd like you to layout that Excel file... that csv file, so that we can produce a list of business cards... for different people automatically. Then I'd like you to send it to me. There's different ways, so check on the platform you're watching. It might be a link in the comments... or some of them have class files you can go to... or exercise projects you can put them in. I'd love to see it on social media. So I'd like you to go through... learn the technique of data merge, but also do something a little bit more... creative on your own. So let's go do that now. 73. How to create a mockup for your portfolio using InDesign: In this video we're going to look at adding our Spread... that we've done in InDesign... to this 3D mock up that we can use in our portfolio. So, let's go and do that now. There's two things you need to do before we're going to make this happen. You need to sign up free for Mediamodifier. There's a few other competitors to it as well, so go and check them out. These guys will charge you 5 bucks to release the watermark of your image. Seems like an alright deal to me. But check out the other ones, I've only ever used this one. Let's go and look at it. Let's have a look at 'All Templates'. There is-- you can add your stuff to all sorts of stuff. It does the kind of 3D rendering for you... which is really handy if you don't have any skills in Photoshop. I tend to do all of mine in Photoshop because I know how to use it. If you want to do it with me... we'll do it in the advanced version of this InDesign course. Let's say I just want to do a quick and easy way. I want to give you an easy way... you don't have to go off, and hack the Matrix to do it. So I just typed in Magazine. You can see, it picked one of these Spreads here. Now, this one here is the A sizes, so A4... and this one here is more the US Letter sizes... so use one or the other, so that it really fits well. So, over on the right hand side here, I'm going to click on this one. And we need to export our left page, and our right page. So let's go and do that from InDesign. So, pick your best Spread. I'm going to use this one here, I'm going to go to 'File', 'Export'. We did this earlier on in our tutorial, when we exported the format. Make sure it's a JPEG. Where are we going to put it? I'm going to put it in my InDesign exercise files... or class files that are on the 'Desktop'. I'm going to call this one 'Right Page'. Very exciting. Actually this is the 'Left Page', we'll do first. Hit 'Save'. And in here, the range, can you see, this is 'D' and '1'. We did this in an earlier exercise... where we looked at renaming the page numbering. Remember, A, B, C, D. This is one of those times where... it's not a hassle, you just got to remember, that I want D first. I want just this page, you can't do Spreads in this one here. Doesn't really work. And the resolution, 300 or 150? 150 is fine for this occasion. Let's hit 'Export'. So I've got that side, I'll hit 'Export' again. I'm going to do the 'Right Page'. And I'm going to do Range '1'. Leave it all, click 'Export'. So now we've got two JPEGs, hopefully, on my Desktop. Under 'Class Files', and there's 'Left' and 'Right' pages. So now back into Mediamodifier. Choose the file for the Left Page. 'Desktop', 'Class Exercise Files', 'Left Page'. 'Crop'. Slightly off, it's not perfectly the right size. Let's click the 'Right Page'. 'Crop' the same thing. I'll put mine probably a little bit more in the middle, looks okay. And 'Generate Preview'. And this takes forever. But that's okay, it's doing the work for us. We kick back, relax, and speed it up please, Tayla. You can see it's kind of benched it around to float with it. It's added some shadows. A bit of a highlight on it. You can obviously download this option, it has a watermark in it... but you can download a version, pay US $5... and get one that doesn't have it. And although displaying them as a flat JPEG is cool... I reckon portfolios... doing well when they look like they're kind of actually done. Adds a little bit of professionalism to your displays. You might actually have a couple of different Spreads... and use a couple of different views from the same magazine... for your portfolio. All right, that's how to use something quick... easy, and not quite free. The other option is to use Photoshop. There are some cool stuff using the Adobe market. That's a little bit of a long process that we'll do... in the advanced part of this course. All right, I'll see you in the next video. 74. What to do after this InDesign tutorial course? : So we're getting close to the end of this course. The question now is what do you do next. The first thing is, I've set a project to do in the next video. It's a little bit larger than some of the class exercises. It's a full job with briefs and images, and all these types of things. And the cool thing about that is you can use that in your portfolio. And I guess that's the next step. It's filling out that portfolio to get more work. To get better at the type of Desktop Publishing that InDesign is great at. The other thing you can do is there's InDesign advanced. This one's been complete... but there is a lot more that InDesign does. I've separated that out into another course. So go check that one out. The other thing is, I've got other courses on Photoshop... which goes really handy in InDesign. There's lots of things, remember, the images turned up... magically from stock library sites. If you need to be taking images, or fixing them, or adjusting them... like in a black and white, like some of the ones we used in this course... that's the job for Photoshop. Remember, the logos, all those were done in Illustrator. So that might be a course you can do here on Bring Your Own Laptop as well. So go check that out. Or, whatever platform you're watching this. See other courses, keep your portfolio good. And drop me a line, and questions... if you're wondering what to do next. I'd love to help. All right, see you in the next video. Homework time. 75. Class project for your own portfolio.: This is it, this is the big project for the end. This is something you can also use in your own portfolio. So this is the brief. Your client is going to be Bring Your Own Laptop, which is my company. We need a 4-page prospectus for our new classroom. It's a Microsoft Word class. It's a sit-down course that people come to, and we're just launching it. In here, the specs, you probably wouldn't get these in a proper brief... but I want to make sure you cover all of the things... we've learnt in this course. I've given you the resources. So the resources are in your Exercise files, under 'Class Project'. Here they are here. 'Class Project', and I've given you the brief which we're just looking at now. The 'Copy'. Open that up, this is all the text... that's going to be used in this 4-page document. The name of the course, the timing, and how much it is. And a bit of information on it. There are a bunch of images to use, you can use all of them... or just one of them. But at least one. Here's a bunch of Logos, I imagine you'll probably use most of them. But at least you have to use the Bring Your Own Laptop logo. I want to see that somewhere in the document. Obviously, because it's our company, and we want to promote ourselves. I want to see one use of a watermark... where it's just kind of washed out with the opacity. Or if you choose... you can use that Layer Mode technique we learnt earlier. Here he is here, remember that red box in the background. Something to do with Layer Modes, Effects, and Transparency. You'll find it. I want to see at least one cropped image... or you can do that Paste Inside, where we paste inside of a circle or a star. It needs to have Columns, I want that set up from the beginning. Two or three, or four, or five actually, I don't mind... as long as you're actually adhering to the Columns. I want to see at least one Anchored Object. That's where the image moves up and down in a text, and it flows along. I want to see one Table as part of this document. Now, I haven't given any content for that table just yet... so I'll go and add it to that Word document now... to make sure you've got something to work with. I want to make sure you're using Master Pages. It's a great place for the automatic page numbering. I want to see use of Text Wrap, that's where a box, or a shape... or an image pushes around the Type. I want to see at least one Paragraph Style. I imagine you probably have two, or three, but at least one. I want you to use a Typekit font, download it, and use it. And the last thing is I want you to use some sort of Shape. One of the fancy ones, like the Triangle. Star, the Star Burst, or the Polygon, just something in there... so I know that you're using Shapes. So what needs to be delivered at the end? I want to say, a PDF with cropmarks. So when you are designing this 4-page document, you need to have Bleed. I want to see a JPEG flat version. And that is going to be without cropmarks. This is going to be a nice one, it's going to be emailed to a client. And I also want to see a mocked up version on mediamodifier.com You don't have to pay for it, just the watermark version. You can download that, or just take a screen shot and send it. Now where are you going to send it to? If you're doing this on bringyourownlaptop.com... you can use the comments down the bottom. Dump it in as images or a link to Dropbox... or something like that, so I can check it. And I promise I'll check it, I love to see what you've done... and happy to give you any criticism, if you ask for it. It will be constructive, I promise. If you're doing it on Udemy or Skillshare... there are comments sections in Udemy... and Skillshare has even a better option... where they have projects that you can launch. If on Skillsuccess or Total Training, use their comments section. If you found this somewhere, and you've got no way of getting it to me... reach out on social media, on @danlovesadobe on Twitter... or on Facebook. We're facebook.com/bringyourownlaptop You'll find us on LinkedIn and Pinterest... all the other things as well. And hopefully you can use this in your portfolio, if you need to. All right my friends, that is going to be the end of this video. 76. BONUS: Software Updates: Hey there, this is a bonus video that I've made so I can share with you the latest updates that have come out in InDesign since the original recording of this course. Adobe are constantly updating the software, so I thought this would be a handy way to keep you super up to date. Now, I'll go through all of the features and put them in what I think is the most important, to the more obscure ones towards the end of this video. I'm going to stop talking and I'm going to start showing you the new features. First up, if you are playing along and you've downloaded the exercise files, open up the newsletter. It's the only file you can open. Let's talk about the very first feature, and it's unavoidable. It's this properties panel. It's the talk of the InDesign town. Either love it or you hate it. I'm in the love it. I'm going to try and convince you the same, but I'll show you how to turn it off. Basically, it's the same panel that's been in illustrator for a little while, and Photoshop just got at this version. It's contextually sensitive, which is quite cool so, I've got the background selected, nothing. Selected gives me options to change the height and the width and all that good stuff. But when I end up clicking on this image here, I've got image options, text wrap, frame fitting. All that stuff that you end up with a bunch of panels will open if you need to text wrap is this giant one, it's always in the way. The close of the roll-up and what they've done is this little dot, in the corner. There is more. You can click on that and it expands out to be a bit fuller. The one finding the most useful is things like paragraph styles and character styles are fine. It's that big group of panels that I have open always in the way. With this selected here you can see it's got paragraph styles, character styles got lovely little dropdown. You can apply and do stuff. I love it, but there's some things are going to be a bit weird, you going to have to get used to it. Like this image selected. You are like, "the links panel, it's gone." Instead of just going and opening it, which you can do, just go back to the old school way and just have a look at this quick actions and all these things they're quite good. If want to replace to file here and put file placement image. Super easy, super quick. You'll find 90 percent of everything you need just over here in the Properties panel. The one thing you might not be able to live with is, I'm not sure if you've noticed it yet, but the control bar is gone. There is the big bar on the top here. This is the one where I'm like, "I'm not sure I can live without this," missy ugly button on the top. It's too handy. I can see why they turned it off for people that are new, because man, it is daunting and you can get a lot of the options over here. But how about me and you just for this course, we'll try and live without the control panel and we'll see where it folds down. One little tip I just stumbled across was, some of these icons you can click whilst holding down the Option key on a Mac or the Alt key on a PC, and it gives you more options. Some of them don't work. If I hold the Option key down and my Mac, Alt key on PC and click font size does nothing. But I was working in here and I was, ooh. I don't know how I stumbled across this, but I was holding down the option key, I clicked drop caps and it opens up that panel. If you know that there's a panel that you can go into up here, it's likely to be connected to the icon next to the feature here. Does that makes? I had nothing selected. The other one I found was new page, "new page!" It's not what I wanted. I've undone. I want to hold down the option key and click it and you get given a bit more, you can pick master pages and numbers of pages, well, that stuff. Some of them can be clicked, some of them can't. If you're, "no, I am old school, I can't live in this properties rows." You can go up to essential and go back to essentials classic and go back to the way it was in the last version. Probably you've got your own layouts and things sit up anyway, so you can jump back to that. But for this class, we're going essentials, we can give it a try. Like I said, I've been using for a couple of weeks now, I'm somewhere in the properties panel. But like me, complain if there's things that are missing, like I can't believe they removed that. Adobe has few Google Adobe feature requests. It starts off at this site, this wish form, and you end up at this thing called user voice and that's how people vote on features and get into the top of the list. Some complaining, it's helpful criticism. Alright. Next feature. This feature is called adjust layouts. It's been over here, it's been staring at us and now brand new properties panel and this is really amazing. I do a lot of work across consonants. In New Zealand where I'm from an Island where I live. Everything is A4. A lot of work I do ends up being in the US and for some banana reason we like to use different size bits of paper. Let's say, I'm going to look at this top page up here. What I want to do is currently, you can see I've got nothing selected it's set to US letter. I need to get it ready for Europe. I need to go to A4 and you just end up with this. It's my job to show you how it works. You can see format issues, just nothing lines up anymore. Imagine if there was a button that you could click and say, "I'd like you to be A4? " We won't change anything else at the moment. Let's just click okay and be ready to be amazed. Cool, huh. Just went ahead and changed it. I love that so much. Undo, redo. Now, you might have noticed that this thing isn't working, so it's a little bit of prep work or at least some best practices if you work in a company where you know you have to go through all these different file sizes. We're doing a traditional print design. But this might be landscape, portrait designs for e-books or magazines, digital magazines will publish online, maybe banner ads [inaudible] formats. I want to undo that. Before I go and change my adjust layout, I need to do some preventative maintenance. This image selected, I'm going to say I would like you to auto fit and I want you to be fit frame proportionately. No, this one fit content proportionally. I always get mixed up with these if you do too, happens to everybody. Okay, so I'm telling it to auto fit and fit content proportionately and now if I go and change it, click on the background, just layout, change to A4, get ready, it looks good. Now, this is just a really simple page and you're, yes, what happens when you've got lots of columns and text and things? Let's have a look. I'm going to go back file rivet. File rivet, if you don't know, it goes back to the last time you hit save. Okay, just a handy way of jumping back a few steps. Let's look at this page more complex, there's columns, there's margins, there's things. Textboxes I do that all the time. It's habit, I make sure that the textbox fits the edge of the text and that's going to throw some problems. Let's try it now and then I'll show you how to fix it. Missing over set everything's wrong. I'm going to undo and all you need to do is you probably spotted in the app. But look at this, adjust font. You can set minimum and maximum adjustments. I haven't found that to be necessary at the moment for anything that I've worked on. I'm going to make it A4 and I'm going to say, okay, and look at that. Before, after. Just magic, the columns, the gutters, everything just adjusts. Now, what happened to the fonts? You'd be like, because what was it before? Let's have a look, undo. This is when it's US letter. Couple of things to look at. This one here is 40 points and this one here is 10 points. I'm going to turn it back, so now it's A4. Let's have a look. 40 ended up going down to 38.6. Now, it really depends on brand guidelines and how specific you are. If you are, "man, I can't deal with bits of fonts sizes." You might have to go and adjust it now, but it gets you close. Let's look at the body copy here. You can see it's gone from 10.0 to 10.1. You might be horrified and you might be, "there's no way we can live with 10.1 fonts." I guess it depends. A lot of my smaller work, I'm not going to worry about 10.1. But if you're working with a larger business and there's just lots of documents and it's going to cause it to trouble. You could go and clear the overrides. Well, just not adjust the font when you're adjusting the layout. One last little thing is let's say you are not doing that whole US to metric to imperial thing, you're just doing design changes. Let's say just you personally, or the client comes back and says the margins are too tight. We need to push them out. There's just a lot of layout work you're going to have to do to fix that, right? Let's do that. Adjust lay out and then here, I'm not going to change the page size, I'm just going to play around with the margins. I'm going to use the inside and the outside. I'm going to bump it up some random measurement. Actually random 30 millimeters. You can just type in measurements if you're not sure how to do it and points. I'm going to click okay. Keep an eye on like things like this. This is one of the things I'm, "it's only a small thing" but watch. Shuffled in, all the column's changed. You can see here, man, just really good. Even if you're not using it for full document changes, super handy just for small like margin changes. One last thing, I believe can be changed as well. You come back and we need three milles for everything. That's a believe typically in my part of the world. I'm going to click okay and you'll see it just tucked it a little bit, but it adjusted the image. I need to do it a bit better. Let's go back to old school six mille. Keep an eye on this and the image down here. Click okay. Just got bigger and it drove out the image. The only thing you might have to check is luckily this image, I think it's big enough or already being set to auto. Remember when we did the auto up here, this guy needs to be auto fit and next second option in. Alright, let's auto adjust, that's my favorite. We did properties first because we couldn't really ignore it, but adjust layout was one of those life-changing features, in my opinion. Anyway, let's look at the next life-changing feature in InDesign. Quickly before we move on, if you are enjoying this video, hit the like button really helps me and my teaching thing. If you like my teaching style, hit subscribe. Also note that I've done reviews of all the new Adobe 2019 software. There will be links to them all in the description. If you want to hear more of my Kiwi accent and you want to say, get up to speed with InDesign properly, I have an InDesign essentials and InDesign advanced course. To search for my name, Daniel Scott, if you want to do one of those. Alright, back to the features and this one is a big one. Imagine if there was a way you could send your PDF to a client, they could add comments and that they come back into InDesign? Not only would they just indicate where the changes were they'd actually update the text. If that doesn't sound exciting view skip to the next feature. But for me and a lot of people out there, I know this is amazing. We used to go to word and it was a workaround for it. There's lots of plug-ins that try and do it. But pro and InDesign can't do it by itself until now, and the workflow is amazing. Let me show you how the workflow goes. I've done this for the client. I've got to send it to the clients. I'm going to go file, export. It has to be a PDF for this to work and print all interactive it doesn't matter. I'm just going to call it newsletter. I'm going to click save, and I'm going to leave everything set to the default. I'm going to I click export. It's obviously text. I know. Oops. Alright, so now you're pretending to be the client or your boss, or your studio manager or your account manager who does the mock-up on your work. What they need to do is they need to use Acrobat and they need to use these commenting option. Commenting opens along the top here, I'm using the latest version of Acrobat Pro and basically most of these features work. Let's have a little look. Let's just put in a little sticky note to say, "I hate this image." I can't spell image of this. Okay, so great feedback then. Let's have a look at some of the texts, where it gets really nice is when you've got like this, I'm going to highlight this text and explain that I believe this is over set. That's cool, you can underline stuff. It's probably loads of bad spelling in here. What I really like though, is when you start doing stuff like this, when you want to insert text and this is where it gets exciting. Maybe just exciting for me, maybe exciting for you too, is Rosemary grows best in full sunshine. I don't know what I'm editing. But inside there's a bit of texts that I've left out so my copyright, well maybe my editor is adding things. A mini version of InCopy if you've ever used that. Let's going to go in there. What else is handy? I can delete stuff so I can say, see this one here it says strike through text. I'm just going to remove this. It's obvious that needs to go. You can draw on things, you can pick a color. Maybe somebody we can draw on. A supper mature stamps. This last few don't come through to InDesign. The handy didn't know if you've never used the thing before so if you're working in a place where you need to do this, you need to say, "I am approved," then you can do that. There's loads of cool stamps in here. I won't show them all but lots of dynamic ones to say this has been approved by me at this time. You can see it's actually a date and time has my name from my login. But this stuff is good for PDS but doesn't come through to InDesign. During shapes does adding attachments doesn't. But enough of this, let's save it. Save file. Jump it into InDesign, and this is where the magic happens. What you need to do is under window, let's go to PDF commits and this little bar ends up and that's the little icon for it. I'm going to import the comments from my newsletter in my exercise files, usually to PDF. You ready for the magic? Look at that. One thing it won't do is when I was first testing this I was in preview mode. If you know Preview mode or a shortcut, hit the "W" key on your keyboard or down here, you can turn it off. To make sure you're not in preview. You got to be in normal otherwise they don't appear. Let's have a look. My very useful way, I hate this image so I'm going to go through and switch it out. File image placement, lovely. I'm going to auto fit it proportionately. I always get confused which one of these two to use. Don't worry we are we going to look at another fancy way in a second. That's done. I hate that image so I have done that one ticked it. You can tick it or delete it, click on it, it'll jump to it. My approved is there but the stamp doesn't come through, so I'm just going to get rid of that. Now the stamp get rid of that. Last we've got over see it. Remember the highlighting, the highlighting appears, it isn't in print. If I go back to preview. There it appears. Totally right on it's totally opposite. Now I've done that one. Now this is where it gets really cool. Marking it up is one thing, but actually adjusting ticks is where I find this thing super amazing. This is all being strike through. Remember, I continue to accept. That's the wrong one. Did strike through down here as well so search is gone. But look at this first paragraph really, I don't know where I am heading. Where's the one? Needs to go, here it is. Click, just deleted the paragraph. Lets return in there see if there might be some work flow you might have to work out with your commenter or your editor and this one here as well. We've done that one. There it is. Let's add this. Where was it? We might have to click it and see. Accept. There it is. I don't know what I'm adding there it is there. You can just say it just adds it in. If you're going to be like my editor, Margaret, she does all of the ticks editing for me. You might just delete this whole thing, put extract through for that and add her own big chunk. You'll need to work out a workflow that works right for you. Anything else that's in there? Yeah. Missing lines in their. Goodbye lines. A couple of things you can do is instead of going through them one by one, say you trust them completely, you can just go up to here and say actually, just apply all of them. I've already gone through and applied them separately. We can say delete them all, claps them all. Tag them all up so we're nice and clean as you can see them. This is the only other option is I'm going to undo. You can just turn them off so you can't see them. Just turn to hide comments on and off. Don't print. So you can't just leave them on. But I love the workflow is super handy. If not as good as if you liking then you're like, man, I wish there was a more complicated, not complicated. I wish it was more features to that then you might want it to look into InCopy. Goes hand in hand with InDesign often. What will happen is the designer will be using InDesign and whoever is in charge of the copy-writing will be using InCopy. Why do I have to separate ones? Because ones are really focused on ticks domains and you can do cool things where you lock things like images and layouts and fonts choices to just a few little options. The design gets to say you can do this much editor, but not more and the editor gets a really purpose-built ticks editing software. Onto the next feature it's called content aware fit. We're going to close this down. Where are we going to do it? We'll do it here. I am on page 3, and what I want to do is continue with fit. We've done auto fitting with images already remember this one up the top here. What I want to do is show you that very new feature for fitting and it's pretty clever. It's using some sort of Adobe Sensei, machine learning AI, it's probably one of those things. Let's bring in a bunch of images. File and then to place can't help that shortcuts command D that I use. Look, user properties panel. Come on. I'm going to bring in an image. I am going to bring in these three. So shift click the top one and then the last one and you select all three. Click "Open". I want all three of these images. You can see if I use my right arrow key on my keyboard, they were different, I picked images that had really different ratios and formats. It's like a square one and a long thin one and a portrait one. That's just my arrow keys on my keyboard. I want to put them all down at the same time. This is not the shortcuts by the way, this is not the feature, at least. This is just cool gratify, and a lot of people don't know it. If you hold down the command and shift key on a Mac or control shift on a PC and drag out, you can see get this grid of images. I'm holding down the command shift on a Mac or a control shift on a PC. The other little trick for this is you can use the arrow keys, you can let go of control shift, keep holding the mouse down. You can use up to add more, down to remove them. Left, right. Just to add. You can use page up and page down, will do the spaces in between them. Anyway, we need three images. I'm going to line them up here. I go about that size. Hey, that happens all the time. Because nobody ever gets the perfect ratio images. You end up doing things like this option you're like, "Yeah, but you see this person at the top. That one's not too bad". Lets have a look. I'm going to do a couple options. I'm going to duplicate it. Let's actually do it all over here, little bit of space. This option, and I'll do this option and we'll do a third option. That's how it came in. We're going to use this first option and you can see it fills the image inside the frame, which is cool, but it's done some weird stuff with the people and I've got to go and amend it. Imagine if there was a clever little button that looks like this, that somehow went off and worked out clever things like where people's faces where in compositions and 3-D takes a little while. But look at that. This first one's not a big deal. When I was practicing, it did make a big difference. So I will try and break it and see if I can make a way. But this one here is very clear. It's gone through impact the hidden shoulders. It's called Content Aware Fit and it's just very clever. Lets see if I can break this one again. Instead of using that ratio, let's use something else. Lets do a couple of options, different shapes. One of them I did and it really looked good I'm trying to prove to you that it works. Two options. This top one here we're going to use L fit to frame and then this one here we're going to go content aware. Give it a second and take a little bit longer, it's analyzing stuff. It's pretty high resolution images as well. Its hides in it, it's not clipped off that's what I made before. This one here is not too different a little bit, not as big a gap at the top there. Will this change my life forever? No. But it's quite handy. It's no adjust layout, but it's definitely one of the more sexy things that have gone into InDesign, AI, machine learning, Adobe Sensei. But if you are dealing with Cardventure, it's not going to do much. I played around with this for quite a while to try and find good examples. I tried to find maybe product shots what it did it well with. It does really well with people. It's major feature, anything else? It's not perfect. But this is the first version of it. I imagine if you're looking at this and it's a year from now, it's the end of 2018, by the way, you might be using it and it's just a phenomenally more better. Those aren't really words, but you know what I mean. It's going to get better and better. Now, that's the default, that's the way default. You can turn this on by default. On a Mac, go to InDesign preferences, and go to general. If you're on a PC, go to Edit, right down here somewhere we is preferences and go to general. Where is it? The bottom feature here make it the default. Now, I totally would. It takes a little bit longer, but it definitely gives you a better starting point than this original default. But I've got to turn mine off because I'm a teacher and I need mine to look like everyone else like this. But if I wasn't, I'd be tuning it on. Thank you very much. You go down here and let's get onto the next page up. Next feature is secretly my most favorite, but it's not very sexy and you can't really start a video with. Let's look at this thing that's really just basic but really helpful. That's number four on my list, but you probably going to love this as much as I do. Let's look at the problem it solves. So bullet points. I'm going to make it a bullet point using our properties panel. But I want the spacing between just these bullets because it's using this spacing from the body copy, I'm going to say actually, you guys can you just have a paragraph. I don't know why paragraph I use quite a bit, so I might have to have that panel open a bit because clicking these little dotted lines is a bit of a pain. But lets say I'm going to have it at say zero. I just want them stuck underneath each other. You see it a paragraph style for these bullets, great, but then I want something different for the bottom ones. So the last of the bullets needs another paragraph style that does some spacing back to 10, same as the rest of it. If you want some spacing above the bullet lists, you're going to have to put in another paragraph style that does this. You end up with three paragraphs styles to make a pretty simple bullet point list. But now I'm going to undo loads. The next feature with the new feature is the same thing, bullet points. You're going to have to open up your paragraph panel, and this is the new option. Doesn't have a very good name, space between paragraphs using same style and it's a little bit inception-y, is very hard to explain. Took me ages to get my head around it. I'm going to try my best to explain it nicely for you. But if you do find later on your own, it's worth working out though. What we're going to do is we're going to ignore this one. What we're going to say is this thing here, the space between paragraphs using the same style, I would like this to be zero. It's all stacked up nice to each other, but you can see we get the gaps at the side. What it's doing is it says, as long as the style repeats, so this one here, actually, let's make it a style. Doesn't actually have to be an official style, just has to be different from the one above it. I'm going to call this to make it clearer. I've got bullets. Then this one here you can see is body copy. What it's saying is, as long as bullets is followed by bullets, i will be zero. Where is it? Is this one here. This one here as well, bullets followed bullets, so i will be zero. This one here. Unless the style changes. Bullets becomes body copy, so what ends up happening is it uses this other option. If bullets follows bullets, it's zero, unless it's different and it's going to use this option. I could grab all this side and I can increase it. It doesn't have to be the same as body copy. This is just do this unless the style changes, then do this, do that help explain it? That becomes the main when you use between styles, it's the hard core one, and this is the option that only happens if the style changes. I'm going to go back to 10 because that's what I wanted. I rerecorded that a couple of times. It was my best one. I'm going to stop there because the next one might not be as clear. Play with it because it is amazing, I think so. Let's say this one here now, because I've spent the time doing this style. I watch this 3D, bullets. I'll get to that. One more thing I want to show you for good measure, and it's not in the Properties panel, this is like, "Okay, I'm going to have to go back to the Control Panel." I like it too much and I know where everything is. Keep the properties awesome. But I'm going to use the Control Panel if it ever opens. What I'm looking for, if you don't know this one, get ready to be amazed. This is not a new feature, it just happens to be awesome. Make sure you are on your paragraph and down here there's Split 2. Look at that. No crazy tabs panel, just you can split it by three or two. Mine doesn't fit. Three. It's too small. Big of the idea. Why would they have a good measure? You can say the same thing for this, instead of splitting it, you can span, I'm going to get it to span across all of them. That can be handy for stuff. Not really what I want here, but a little bonus. All right, next featured time. This one's not as good looking as the other ones, but for a few people this is going to be pretty useful. I'm going to delete this. What I want to do is get this table that I've got here into one column. I have footnotes. Not a very exciting topic, but fundamental to the Desktop Publishing game. Let's say I want to add a footnote to this text here. In earlier versions, 2018 and earlier, you couldn't go up to Type and Add, Insert footnote, this is just grayed out, wouldn't work in a table. We can use the new Properties panel, getting used to it. I can now insert footnotes into tables, paste it in, and I've already added a style to it. I'm going to add another one. Another one. That's all I really need to show you really, you just do footnotes in tables, but it does segue into the next new feature in InDesign 2019. Today I want to show you, let's add endnote. Footnotes are the bottom of the page, endnotes at the end of the document, or at least your textbooks. I'm going to insert one here, Endnote. You can see it's just jumped all the way to the end of my text frame. I'm going to add one more in there. A new feature, it's quite handy, is you can convert one to the other. What I'm going to do is, I've got my cursor flashing anywhere in the textbooks that you're working with, it's a long linked textbooks, I'm going to say Type. There's one here says convert footnotes to endnotes instead of them being up here. Where are they? Right there. I can say Type, convert to endnotes, please. You can say footnotes or endnotes. Scope, you can look through the whole document or just the selection that you have selected. I'm just going to do the whole document, found two of them. Let's check it up. I'm not sure why I've got have to returning that. You can go back the other way as well, which is cool, the weird thing is it's in the same place, so I wanted to end the endnotes back into footnotes, so Type and you can see here there's no endnote to footnote, there's lump them both together. Even though I wanted the opposite of what this is, it doesn't really matter. I can just switch it here. I go back to their home places. Done. Endnotes are gone and you have get rid of that text, but hopefully now. Here's my table. That one, that one, they're all there on the page with a return. Once I've finished this video I'll work out why. But for the moment, you can do footnotes inside tables, yay. You can convert endnotes to footnotes and footnotes to endnotes. Where I find this most useful is when you're bringing in stuff from Word and somebody's used endnotes in one document and footnotes in the other, and you've got have a style guide to follow. We need to switch them around, now you can. Let's go to the next feature. Now the next feature is not really a feature, it's a missing thing. This is a test. You need to tell me what is missing from what we're going to do now. Something's gone. It's as Scooby Doo mystery. You're part of it. I'm going to go and package my document. I need to send it to a client or the printer, we need to archive it. File package, I'm going to go and click Package and I'm going to save it. I'm going to put it onto my Desktop. I'm going to call it Newsletter folder, then I click Package. Missing fonts, sure thing. I got overset text. Sorry about that. Should fix it. Now something happened here. Well, something didn't happen here, do you guess what it was? It's that annoying printing instructions thing that it always asks you to fill out that you'd never do. It was just that we've moved it, you can turn it back on. If I go to Package, it's this thing here. We'll package and I'll show you. You know that thing you've never filled in, but it comes up every time? Now there might be people who do fill this in, I can see the point of it, but I know if I send this to any of my printers not one of them is going to open it to check it, might be in a different production line where this is quite. Good. You can turn it back on, or like me and let it go, and make sure it's off forever, never to come back. It's not really a feature, but it's worth mentioning. Next feature is a visual font browsing. I'm going to click on some text. In my Properties panel over here, the character, you'll notice that this pop-out got a whole lot different, it's a lot bigger. A couple of things have happened. Actually what I'm going to do is I'm going to make this bigger. I'm going to select the text first, you don't have to do this. But over here, the new features are, you can decide this dropdown. I think the default is Selected Text. You can see the little sample text, it's actually what I have selected over here, Cafe Growth. Because we all know we pick a font from here and it looks good in the preview, but without particular characters, it just doesn't look good so it's easy to do this. Often I like switching it to Typography for some reason. It just got a lot of the ascenders and descenders. It's a good kind of, I guess, generic look at a font. You can also go in here and pick a hungry, roger, hungry, ate. You can decide on these. I'm going to switch it back to Selected Text. There's one in there as well, upper. I find that sometimes quite useful in numbers. Back to Typography. You can also change the preview size. It's this little icon here, it's handy because we're just dealing with one word, only use the larger size. The other thing you might notice that you can see when I roll over it, you see updating the text over there. Over there, back over here. That never used to happen as well. A live text preview, it updates as you're working through it. The other big thing they've done with typography is they've actually removed the need to jump out to Typekit. If you've used Typekit before you go to the website, pick a font, download it. They've done it actually built in, which is cool. It's called find more. Not very exciting, but actually this, crazily, is fonts that aren't on your computer. They're actually just on Typekit. Here's just thousands and thousands of fonts so you can just start using. They've done away with the jumping in and jumping back out, you just do it by hitting Find More. The other thing that you'll know is that they've called it Adobe Fonts now. It used to be called Typekit. Adobe have done away with that name now, and now Typekit is just Adobe fonts. What's really cool about it is let's say, where's a font that we want? Let's say we're going to use filters. Filters have been around for a while, but people don't use them in a circle. I'm going to say I want a hand-written fonts. I'm now looking at Typekit, all the hand-written fonts, and you can see that hovers above it and I can actually just download this to my computer now. I'm going to activate it, this please, and it's downloading it. You can see it's synching there and I'll just have Adorn on my computer and as long as I continue with my Creative Cloud license, keep paying for that, you're going to keep the fonts. You see there, it's updated. Yes, pretty cool. Now we're jumping out to the font or 1001 free fonts. Unless you need a cactus shape font. Pretty sure it's the only place to get those. Just click on the Find More and use your filters to cut it down to stuff like, say the hand-written, you might be picking Slab Serif fonts or you can look at these ones at the different x heights. Maybe need to condense width, just super handy filters for finding fonts on Typekit. Super-quick, super easy, and then just downloaded them within the app. It'll be available in all apps, so it'll be available in Illustrator and Photoshop now, and hopefully now Adorn. There, nice on my computer. We did it well. The other thing to note with the change of Typekit to Adobe fonts is that, show their old version, so their old version if I went into fonts here, maybe this thing here, add from Typekit, so that's changed. Now it's just fine font and here, this one here, the Typekit. I still uses this quite a bit because I want to see all the Typekit fonts, they have changed that icon to look like this now, so if you want to see on your computer all of the Typekit fonts, well, the new Adobe fonts, just click on that, so once that have been activated. Let me go through and pick one from the ones you've downloaded from Typekit. Another handy feature that they've updated in here is this option. I'm going to turn off my activated fonts and I'm going to turn on the ones that are recently added. This is just really handy if you've installed fonts. You can see here, at the top is the recently added fonts. You might have installed them through InDesign or Photoshop, or you might have gone through and done it with Font Book or Suitcase, embrace so you use Suitcase. However you've installed a font on your machine it'll just be like show me the new ones, please. Go on, make sure you turn them off when you're filtering them and one last thing they've done is that they've gone and moved a couple of things that were handy, that were along the top here. These two little icons, they used to be up here. Now if you hover above the ticks, can you see this is next to the type and it show visually similar and make a favorite. If you're using komu to new fonts, you want to edit to your favorites, click it there, and add that one, I'm going to add this one, I am going to add that one to my favorites. Instead of having to scroll down your giant font list, what you can do is you can say, just show me the ones I'm allowed to use. Really handy if you're in a corporate environment where you do have two different weights and two fonts. It's no point scrolling, just set favorites on them and then click this little "Star" up here, turn it off by clicking it again. One of the little feature that have moved, and it's just cool like say, like this one, you actually show me the visually similar ones. That's just a little double wave is pretty clever, I don't know how it does it, but you can see we had great vibes, but look at all these fonts that are very similar there on my computer. That is a visual font browsing. It's updated in Adobe Illustrator this year as well. You'll see the same thing in there, the one thing with the visually similar one, you need to go to this little back button. Does say get out of there please? Next feature, the next feature is more just a thing that happens, that's quite handy. When I go to File Export, what happened in the past was let's say this thing here needed to be an indirective PDF. I'm going to click "Save" and zoom through it all, so I exported it indirective PDF and then I went to a completely different document that had nothing to do with the first one, it's not meant to be a PDF indirective, but InDesign, just removed the last thing you did. But now what happens, let's say in this case, this guy is meant to be print or might be preferable EPUB or fixed layout might be JPEGs. What are you doing? It's going to remain the pit document now, so that was indirective PDF. The old version, if I went to export again now aided say "Hey, do you mean look, it's remembered." Remembered that this guy was indirective pdf and this guy was a PDF and you can have another thing that's EPUB and other one that does JPEGs, so it's per document now, which is really handy. We've all got it right you got like ten different documents open that need to come out and they have all their own different formats. Now they're going to remember, and the crazy thing is that they remember across a life facing this to a different computer or colleague or my home computer, it's going to remember the two and it saves into another option, Let's another feature. If I got a file export, there's this thing that wasn't there before. What I'm going to do is on my desktop, I'm going to export this one, so that's using key six using the exact same name I've got my InDesign document, whereas in the past what would happen is, if I turn tick that I would call this one maybe V1.1 or low less or something else and I exported it. When I went back into Export, it remembered the last thing I called it. With this option on, it's going to always default to whatever the document name is. It's on by default and you can see here it says it's only going to work the next time I do this, I'm going to skip through this. The reason I show you that is because you might rely on it because that's the way it used to work and it's going to differ key sets defaulting to the name of the file again. If you like the old way where it edited, because sometimes you have a working file and it's going to terrible name when you've got a rename it for a specific job or something, and it's great that it remembers it, it's not going to know unless you turn that off. It's a solution to a problem I never had, but I'm sure obviously somebody had it because Adobe is going to edit it there. But just know you can uncheck and go back to the way it was. Next feature please. Actually the next feature is the last feature and before you run away, take a quick little requests from me if you enjoyed what I've done here, could you give me a like consider subscribing to the channel, 77. Adobe InDesign CC 2021 New Features & Updates!: Yes, it is that time of year again. Adobe InDesign has dropped all it's brand new 2021 features. My name is Daniel Walter Scott. I'm a designer and I'm an Adobe certified instructor. I'm going to take you through the new features plus the sneaky one that they dropped about three months ago that is probably my most favorite new feature that has come out in InDesign in a very long time. Let's cover the new ones first, and then we'll cover that sneaky one a little bit later in the video. Lets jump in. The first one, Content-Aware rep. Let's jump down to page 6. I'll throw in some shortcuts as we go around. It's the time to learn some shortcuts as well as new features, that's Command J or Control J on a PC, six, enter, it's good for long documents. Ours isn't that long. Let's bring in our images, Command D, Control D on a PC. I'm going to bring in these three, click "Open". Actually, another little shortcut, your left and right arrow means you can toggle through the ones you've had selected. In this case, I've accidentally put it on purpose to show you a little shortcut is this one I don't want, you can just hit "Escape" and it clears it, we're back down to two. So I want this one there and that one there, and let's do that content where I want the ticks to wrap around the outside of this man here. He's got a nice contrast between him and the background. Let's click it. You can't use this text wrap one at the moment, there's not enough detail in it. You've got to go to "Text Wrap", the actual panel under Window, click on that. Click the third one along this object, and then it's text wrapped and it's pushed everything kind of outside of its box. But you want to change it down here where it says "Type" to "Select Subject". You really, you steady, new feature time. It's good. Pen tool. It gets a bit way with around his head, but if you are like me, if you've used the Pen tool to do a text wrap, yours looks way worse than that, a couple of big giant circles, if you're like me anyway. You can play around with whether it's left side or right side or both sides or in this case, largest area seems to always work for me. We can play around with how far away the distance, watch this go up 1, 2, 3. If you hold Shift, you can go up in 10s, multiples of 10. That works for any up and down. You could use kerning or leading, so hold Shift when you get the arrows. That's going to be enough for me. Let's have a look now at another example because that one works really well. I found an example that works really well. Let's have a look at one that works okay, and I'll show you some extra bits for it. I'm going to go to File Place again, that's Command D on a Mac, Control D on a PC. Let's go to coffee, I'm going to open it up and I don't really have a place for it to go. I'm going to actually just drag it out. Let's kind of put it. How big do I want it to be? That's big. I'm going to send it to the back "Command Shift" square bracket. The first of them on a PC, it's "Control Shift" square bracket. I'm going to get it kind of in the middle there. I should really tidy up the edges because you're watching. I entirely would do this on my own. We've got our coffee mug, our coffee cup. I've got it selected. Same thing again. Click on it. It's good on here, "Select Subject", and you can see it's done a average job at the clipping mask. It's weird, Photoshop does it amazingly. They've got a new feature that does the path select. Hopefully InDesign gets it soon as well. You might be looking at it and it does a whole lot better job. But in this case, what you can do is you can see, I can kind of push this out. This is what I'm doing is I'm pushing it out. To be honest I'd probably leave it like that and probably go for largest area again and be happy enough with that. But say you do want to adjust it. You've got to kind of do it as the last part. Because look what changes over here in my tics rep panel. If I start grabbing any of these dots with my Y arrow or my direct selection tool and I go actually I want to push that one out. You see what happened? Now it's a user-defined path and I can't kind of do that automatic adjustment, you could do it manually. Let's zoom in. You can kind of just bend it around, so if you get close you can go through and do some adjustments. Probably for this coffee cup though. Let me just do a big giant circle, a big giant oval at the end here. But pretty nice, especially if you've got more complex things like this guy here, saved loads are time, this one here, maybe two circles would have worked. But it wasn't that hard to adjust. Last thing before we go. This came out a little while ago now slick on him, it just went in at full size. You can go to this last little option of here, Content Aware Fit and that tries to look at the image and tries to fit in best as he can within the frame. That was close enough. That's what I do. Dump image, click "Content Aware", and make my final adjustments. Next feature and new for 2021 is Locate Colors. Now this Locate Colors is basically the quick short version as if you go "Find Change", look, we've got "Color" at the end here now. Let me show you kind of some practical application. Let's dump something in the cover here, so Command D, Control D on a PC. It's my cover image in. Put it in there. Again. That's good for me. I'm going to grab a couple of colors using my eyedropper tool. With the I key, I'm going to grab one of these peachy colors hopefully. I'm going to add it to my swatches panel. I'm going to close down "Text Wrap", open up my "Swatches". I'm going to add that one to my Swatches. I'm going hit "Escape" when I go to my move tool and back to the eyedropper tool to kind of clear out the eyedropper. I want a slightly color from her shit. I'm trying to tie in some of these ticks colors with image. I want that one as well. I've got a slate in a peach, just double-click them and they with color value we use slate. This one here we'll use peach. There's a couple of things you just need to double-check if you haven't done a whole lot of finding and changing is let's go to "Edit". "Find Change". Make sure it's color at the end here. You have been able to do color for a little while, about for a long time, you could do it with objects and with ticks separately, but you now you can just do it as a general kind of let's just do color. Not worry about what we're defining lots of things within colors and objects. I'm going to find this green that I've being using. This is already in my Swatches. Look at that. You can do 10 ranges as well, but I want that RGB color. I want to change it to my new one, which is going to be this peach. The thing with it though is you've got to make sure if you have something selected, you'll have an option here that says selected and that won't work. So just say all of this document or if you've got lots of documents open, you can do it all at once, which might be super handy for you. You can decide on which kind of frames as well. I'm just going to let it do everything and I'm going to click "Change All". It's going to run through three instances. Hooray, a nice, simple adjustment and nice little addition for InDesign. Let's have a little look at a problem you might have is, say I want to change this gray, this gray is being used quite a bit through this document. Okay, down here, lots of places, but I don't have it as a swatch, so we can't do that color switch. You do need to convert it into a swatch first. So let's grab this color. Let's add it as swatch. I'm just grabbing the text. I'm going to say you are a new swatch and pulled it out. HSB, we'll discuss in a little seconds, it's a new thing for InDesign 2021 as well. Now it's in there. I can go and change it all. Sometimes it is nice and an excuse to show you a cool little shortcut is down the bottom here. There's a button that you've never clicked, click on that one. It's really nice that you can see this document plus you can start scrolling down. This is two views of the exact same thing, but now I can kind of start to see what else gets changed. I can see in here and over here. Let's go to "Edit". Change it from peach to the b-color that we created to the one that we want to switch it to, which is slate. Have a little look. Title, dev box, ticks various places. Let's go make sure it's on document. "Change All", look at that. Twelve and instances has changed. Thank you very much. That is Find and Change Color, super useful. Let's click "Done". Look at the next one, it's called HSB color and my accent, HSB is H for hue, S for saturation, B for brightness, HSB. To get to it, let's see this. I've got nothing selected, I got my foreground color, I'm going to double-click it and if you're using RGB and you're like, great, I like this color. Let's make it darker tone of it. You're like, what do I do? Where do I drag it? Do I drag it down this way? RGB is a weird color space. I don't know why, it's not even primary colors. What's green doing in there? I know, I know, it's something to do with light, but anyway, let's look at this HSB. I'm going to cancel that because I've destroyed my color. Go back in there, so instead of trying to mess with RGB or trying to do the old just add some k trick to seem like, hey, does anybody do that? I do it just work a bit of k in there and it gets darker. But now you can at least play with these new little sliders. So they're not new, they've been around. It's just a different way of controlling RGB. They're exactly the same, just you can do it by hue, saturation and brightness rather than red, green, and blue. Hue, obviously, up and down, hue slider working my colors. Saturation, I can make it more saturated, less saturated and brightness, the one I use quite a bit, just to darken things up. I'm going to cancel that because I've messed around with it. Double-click it to go back in and just go to brightness and go give me a darker version, please. I can add it to my Swatches, click "Okay". I don't often use this. I kind of use it on the [inaudible] show you, let's close down these double windows. Let's say this one here. Let's get a lighter version. Double-click it. If you're like me, use these little windows to change the colors you go to here, you go up to here, and now HSB, instead of switching to these ones. So HSB, and again, I probably like these slide is even better than the way it's displayed over this side. I can actually just give me a lighter version. Unsaturated, look at that. I'm going to add that to my Swatches as well, Swatches, plus. Now I've got my original color, my original peach, and I'm just dragging it up, I've got a lighter of vision and a darker vision. I guess it helps explain, you'll end up with these and forget. You're like, well, what is HSB being in here? It's just another way of displaying, it's the same color spaces as RGB, it's just a different way of working it. It doesn't matter if your using the RGB version of it or the HSB. Lab CMYK, completely different colors spaces, these are the same. Anyway, I wanted that one to be the darker one, I want it to be a nice big box in there. Command Shift square bracket, send it to the back. Actually it's on the wrong layer. Let's get over the right layer even, Background. There we go. I want this to be my new fill color. Anyway, it's actually pretty backed in. You can go to your Preflight panel and it's actually in there as well. So Window, it's got a Preflight which is hidden under, I remember Output. Let's go to Preflight. You can define it in here. Let's make a new one. Let's go to Define Profiles and you can see in here colors, there he is. But he's not color spaces that you might not be allowed. You might be deciding that you don't need RGB. Basic Copy, this is Dan's Preflight. This will give you a warning if you are using these wrong color spaces. I don't want RGB, but I also don't want HSB, because it's the same thing. So click "Okay." Let's actually define the profile. Checking, 30 errors because they use always HSB colors. So that is huge saturation brightness. If you are using Illustrator and InDesign use them in there as well, there basically implemented the same way. You might find them a little bit more helpful. Next new feature is something called Recovery as a Service. What is it? It is when your files go corrupt and your computer doesn't know what to do with it. You can actually send it to Adobe now or automatically send it to them and they can see whether they can fix it for you on your behalf. It's a bit of an automated process. Now, I can't make this happen. I can't break or corrupt the files. I have just got some screenshots of what is meant to happen. You have something, it opens up, it can't open it. It says "Would you like it to process it temporarily on their servers?'' You say, ''Yes'' because it's broken and it does some stuff. It opens it up and recovers it. So up until recently, there was just an email you send it to. But to be honest this is a new feature. I guess, that fairly state. But for me, I don't know. InDesign for me is been super stable for so long now. I guess that's why we like InDesign. You might be different, you might be like finally, Recovery as a Service is going to be useful for you. I can't seem to break my files anymore. But anyway, that's a new service that's in there. If it discovers an openable document it will try and fix it automatically. Now, there's one more update for InDesign 2021. It's a small update to something that came out only a couple of months ago. I bet you there's lots of people out there who haven't seen, Share for Review. So there's a couple of updates to that, but I bet you there's lots of you who have never heard of it and I want to share with you. It's my absolute favoritest update for InDesign for a very long time. Share for Review. Easiest way, click this icon and you Share for Review. Whatever reason you don't have that one you can go to File and Share for Review. Either way you end up in the same place here. So I've got my name of my document. I'm going to create a Share for Review. Basically, this is web based, so this is going to go out to my client or my stake holder, whatever you want to call that person, and they don't have to have InDesign, which is amazing. They can do. So Invite Only. Let's just do a quick version of it. I'm going to, and I'll double back and show you the nuanced parts of it. But let's just got a Public, don't require a password for the moment to make this work. Here's my little link here. I'm going to click it. It's going to open up on a page that's not on the screen. I'm going to drag it up here. Make a full screen, and look at that, I've got a width vision of it that I can share with anybody and they don't need InDesign. They don't even need Adobe ID. It's got the spreads. What's nice about it? I can just share that link. It's here. See there's a little copy thing. Copies it to clipboard. That's not that clear anyway. Then you can just e-mail it to them all or send it via social media but they get this web interface. This brings us to the new updates for 2021. So it's these three buttons weren't there before, really useful. Let's say that, contents page here. Let's say I highlight this, I click on the highlighter, and it highlights it as you would imagine. I can say things like, "Are we using American spelling here?" I can't spell American. It's not taking anybody's work, but I submit it. Let's look at a couple of other ones and then I'll show you how it looks on the InDesign side. You can see it's coming out with my name here because I happen to be logged into my Creative Cloud account. But if this person doesn't have it they can login as a guest or sign up for a free Adobe ID. You don't need a paid Creative Cloud license for this to work. Let's have a look at the other ones is not like you need to know what strikethrough does, but it's on my list of things to show you. I've written down my outline for this video. Anyway, let's look at the last one. Oops, submit that one. This one here, Replace Text, buddies, lowercase b. So let's see what happens back in InDesign. I'm going to close the Share for Review. Now this, let's close back in, get out of here. This opens automatically, if you can't find it you need to go to Windows, go to Comments and go to Review. You can see, it's got those things in here. But it's nice, it works well, I can click on them, it jumps to the bit that I need to replace. Do we need this? Oh, look it even highlights it. Let's say I do delete it. Challenges. Can you see my comment is unmapped now. But I can go into here and say actually I have resolved that, it's done. Let's do design buddies. Let's make a lowercase b and it'll resolve that one as well. Now I'm just showing you how life works. Nothing's too exciting in here, but let's look at it a bit deeper into what you can do. One of the options is you can hide annotations. Now, I've been on preview mode the whole time. W key on the keyboard, you can see my working version. You can see there's my little highlight. You can hide them if you need to if it's messing up your flow. You can't filter them as well it's pretty clever. By the different reviewers, times of days, status. That'll make sense as well. A couple of other interesting things before we finish up is under this, say due to this changes, the web version doesn't update automatically. You've got to go Share for Review and you've got to go to Update Link, and then it will update. Surprised how fast that works. Other things you might do is you might require a password, you might go Invite Only and add specific people. You can add e-mail addresses, they don't need to be specifically Adobe IDs at this stage. Let's say I put in somebody I know that doesn't have an Adobe license. They will be required to create one. It's free to do, add comments and stuff. Otherwise, you're good to go public and use the password. It's up to you how smooth you want this to be. I know some clients they going to see that they need to create an Adobe ID even though it's free, they'll freak out. So I'm just going to send them a public link with a password. Another nice thing is for me on this side is I can, let's say I'm not replying to me. I can use this at and start looking at the different people that are included in this. You might have three or four different stake and you can see an at to them specifically. Can't see much of me because I'm probably blurred out down there, but you can add at symbols, and if you do want to jump out to the actual review itself, go back into the web version of it. You can go into here and say Manage Reviews on Web, and it will jump out to the webpage which is also opening up on the wrong screen. Here it is. It's showing me the different reviews I've got on the go. Go into it, I'm back into that same view that my commenter has. Let me switch out to the big camera. Those are the InDesign 2021 updates. What did you like the best? I'm interested to know, drop it in the comments what you thought your most favorite was, second-most favorite was. It really helps me work out what needs to be in the new course, what needs to be upgraded, what people actually like versus what I think they like. So drop that down there. That is it. Oh, also I've got updates for all the other Adobe products, Photoshop, Illustrator, After Effects, Premier Pro, Adobe XD, check those out as well. But that's it for another year of updates. I will see you in another video. Bye now. 78. Adobe InDesign CC 2022 New Features & Updates!: Hi, everyone. In this video, we are going to cover some of the updates for Adobe InDesign 2022. The big upgrade for InDesign this year is the integration more better name of the capture functionality. If you've used the Adobe app called Adobe Capture, then you would have seen some of this tick, but it's cool now that it's built into InDesign. What I mean by this is this image here. I can right-click it and say actually can you extract from this image a bunch of different things. Let's do color themes. Look, it has pooled colors straight from the image. I've picked quite the colorful image that we made earlier. But look at this, awesome, and what you can do is you can save it to your CC library, whichever one you've got open over here. It's given us the colorful options, but we can pick bright ones and we can pick muted ones, and you can see, it's just picked five color swatches that work in a great combination. Deep colors. [LAUGHTER] Yeah. You can also decide that actually I like this, but I need to move it around. You can decide wherever it is there. You can copy them straight out of here. Copy the hexadecimal code and use that or add them to your library. Once I've got it from the library, I can use it. Look. Wow, it's beautiful. [LAUGHTER] I had better plans for that. But hey, you can pull colors from images, which is awesome. You can also pull shapes from images. It's the same thing again. Right-click, Extract from image, Shapes, and it's made a black and white version of it. It's going to make a vector graphic and we use the eraser tool to tidy it up a little bit. How much do I want? I want less. You can see how this would be potentially bit of a like a hand-drawn or some graphic that you're drawing with your hands. [LAUGHTER] Let's save it to the library and see what we get. I'm going to close it down and look at this. I've got a vector shape that I can start using. Look at that. Cool. Let's have a look. Illustrate a victory goodness without having to leave InDesign. It's actually using the power of that Capture app. If you haven't used the app, iPhone, Android, look for Adobe Capture. It does a lot of the stuff as well in your mobile, so you can be taken photos and stuff. [NOISE] Oh, fancy. One of the probably more useful options either than pulling colors from it is I'm going to show you a different method of getting to that Capture panel. Instead of right-clicking in image and going into here, you can actually have nothing selected. Go to your CC Libraries, go to a little plus button, and everything is there. It's new, it's been added to that, and we get to the same place. I can drag my image then we can use straight in here. We can throw in our image directly, and I can say, I don't want the colors, I want the type. Tell me what it is, the stuff font picker? I'm going to pick this shape, and I'm going to say, find similar fonts. It's either going to pick similar or exact. But you know what that font is, you've used it before. Cooper. There's a couple other recommendations in here. They're pretty close, but that one's exactly. I'll save it to my library. It's handy for not just photographs of fonts but even work that you've maybe outlined. You don't have the font or it's a logo from somebody else and you don't have all that kind of workings of it. But you can see in here, now it's a character style. I can say bam. [LAUGHTER] Lovely. That is the main big integration upgrade for InDesign. Let's look at a couple of more. The next is more of a change, and it's worth noting because in the past, if you're an InDesign user, you'll know these guys are master pages. But from now on, they are going to be called parent pages. You will find the word master replaced with parent everywhere when referring to what you know as master pages. It's Adobe's effort to use more inclusive terminology and the note I've got from Adobe is that they're an inclusive company and they won't use words that make people feel unwelcome and hurt, so that's why it's changed. You'll see it change through InDesign in anywhere else in the Adobe products. For me, Premiere Pro has a lot of master fix and master tracks. They'll all get changed. You might have already noticed in Premiere Pro it is now source track instead of master track. If you do notice any of those around and it used to be called master, that is why, inclusive terminology. Next feature. The last small update for InDesign is on a Mac. Go to Preferences, so InDesign, Preferences and go down to User Interface Scaling. On a PC, it's under Edit, Preferences, User Interface Scaling. Now, it's a small one and big one depending on what different technology you're using or hardware you're using. You can see the interface from small to large icons. If you need them to be bigger or smaller, you can do it in here. What used to be the problem is if you plugged in a monitor while you were working, it would automatically guess the UI size. Now you can go and manually pick it because sometimes it would be the wrong one. All right, my friends, that is the updates for Adobe InDesign 2022. Onto the next video. 79. InDesign cheat sheet & shortcuts.: Hi there, my name is Dan. This is a super fantastic Adobe InDesign Cheat Sheet. Now there is a PDF version of this... that you can go to bringyourownlaptop.com Look for the Resources section. And there is a printed version, you can print off... stick next to your desk, learn all the shortcuts, be more awesome. There are also lots of other courses there that you might sign up for. But let's get into the Cheat Sheet. The first tip is converting Imperial to Metric, or vice versa. At the moment it's set to inches... but say I need something that needs to be set to 30cms... I can click out, and it converts it to inches for me. Same works when you are set to millimeters... and we need something to be for inches... click out, and it does the conversion for you. Cool. Now this works in the new document box that we got open. That also works when I hit 'Close'. Click on this box here. The height's set to 1", but say I need it to be 2cms. It would do the conversion to 0.7" for me automatically. Any box, anywhere, that you can type in. You can also do some other cool things with these boxes. Say the width needs to be half of this. So I just type in '/2' for divided by 2. And it converts it to half. Also, some maths can be done. Say I need to times it by 3. Use '♪3'. Click anywhere else in these boxes, and it's now three times as long. You can add, subtract, divide, and multiply. The next tip is 'Command' click, or 'Control' click if you're on a PC. So if I need to get this logo here, but this text box is in the way... I can move this text box, and get to this guy. But what I can do, an easier way... is I can hold down the 'Command' key if I'm on a Mac... or if you're on a PC, it's 'Control', hold it down... using my 'Black Arrow', I click once, I get the 'Type', click again. And I get the layer underneath. I can keep going. Click again. And I get that big washed out graphic. Click again, and I get the Gradient in the background. It's a way to select things without having to unpick them... and move them all around. This next shortcut is probably the one I use the most. I'm going to select this text... and there's a couple I'm going to throw at you. Hold down 'Command Shift' on a Mac, or 'Control Shift' on a PC. And then tap the full stop key, or the period key. And it will make the font bigger. Hit the comma, holding the same keys, it makes it smaller. Bigger, smaller, really handy. Another thing you can do is you can play around with the Tracking. All you need to do, with all this text selected... hold down the 'Alt' key on a PC, or 'Option' key on a Mac... and just use your left and right arrows. Just the little keypad arrows there. The up and the down does the Leading. Handy, I kind of ruined that though. The next tip is, I've got this box in the middle. I've got it using Text Wrap... so it's pushing the text around it away. Problem is, when I try and put other text over the top of it... that's how I want to go here... it won't work, because that same Text Wrap is pushing this text away. Now we could right click this, and go to 'Text Frame Options'... and say 'Ignore Text Wrap'. And that will work for this one box. But then every single time you have any of this sort of instance... you have to go and tick that box again. What if there was a way to change it forever? There is. All we need to do is go to... if you're on a Mac, it's under... 'InDesign', 'Preferences', 'Composition'. If you're on a PC, go to 'Edit', and 'Preferences' is down here. Then go to 'Composition'. So I'm going to go here, 'Composition'. And here's the magical button here. 'Text Wrap' only affects the text underneath it. Which means this guy, this happens to be on top. So he's not going to be affected by it, just the stuff underneath. On to the next tip. Every time you draw a new Type Box... grab Type Box, draw it out, and it's Minion Pro, and 12pt... which I never use. So I'll go and change it. And also, my Swatches panel has boring old fonts that I never use. Wish there was a way to change the defaults forever. There is, all you need to do is, have nothing opened in InDesign. Hey presto. And we need to change the 'Font Start' at the top here to any of these. We're going to use 'Essentials'. Then I'm going to grab my 'Type Tool'. Now if I change Minion Pro to Arial Black. I'm going to put '12pt', and I pick the Leading that I use. And I add any swatches to my Swatch Panel... they will be there forever, watch, 'New Document'... 'Drawing', 'Create'. 'Type Tool', drop box, start typing, 'Arial Black'. We're going backwards from Minion Pro, but you get the idea, right? Make sure everything is closed, switch it to 'Essentials'. And you can change anything, probably the most important to change... 'Start', 'Essentials', 'Type Tool'. Switch to 'Paragraph', and it's this guy here, 'Hyphenate'. He's on by default, nobody likes you on. Turn him off, wherever you draw a Type Box, it will not be hyphenated. You're welcome. The next one is for Mac users only, sorry PC. Let's say that I want to highlight this, and I don't want to make it Title Case. And you know it's in here somewhere, and you will eventually find it... but look, click on 'Help', and just type in 'title case'. There we go, 'down arrow', hit 'return', and it's done it for us. You can see, it even points to it... with a nice big blue arrow, right there. You can just click on this though, it's easier. Let's say that, you've turned off Smart Guides at some stage... you want to turn it back on, but you're like, "How will I do that again?" Type in 'smart', click 'down arrow', click it once... and that turned back on. Remember, big blue arrow, it help you point... and figure out where they are. Thank you, Mac. Next tip, is jumping pages. And it's 'Command J', or 'Control J'. This is one of the documents we make in our InDesign course. But it's quite a long document, we're here, and we need to get to a page... 'Command J', '5', 'enter'. Then back down to page 30... 'Command J', or 'Control J' on a PC, let's type '30'. Hit Enter'. Seems kind of long, but it's one of those things that I use quite a bit... for jumping back from page to page easily. Another cool feature you can do is... say you're trying to see two pages at once... but we've only got one screen, so what we can do... let's say we're dealing with the Contents page... but we also want to be looking at different pages... just to make sure maybe the Headings are matching up. See this insignificant little button down the bottom here? Splits the layout. It's kind of weird, you end up with two versions of the exact same thing. So over on this side, I'm going to zoom in. I can see my Contents page, but on this side though... I can scroll through my document. It might be good if you're working on maybe the front and back cover together. Now I can work through my document... find out my headings, and start doing some work over here. It seems better if we go on a bigger screen. I'm working on a little laptop, so it's not as good. Another thing you can do is... say on this side here, you can look at the big version of the document. So the page, the big overall arching thing. Over here, I'm going to jump to page 1. I'm going to work in, in really fine detail. You can see on this side here, it's adjusting. So I can use it kind of two ways. To turn it off, click that same little button. The next one is playing around with Spreads. So I've got two pages, side by side. We probably know, 'Command 0' on my keyboard, or 'Control 0' on a PC... will fit the page to our view... but if you hold down 'Command' and 'Option', and hit '0'... or 'Control' and 'Option' on a PC... it will fit the Spread. It's really handy. Down here, 'Command Option', '0'... get the Spread nicely in the middle. Now the next tip is a follow on. If I use my Page Down key... Paging down, for some unknown reason, in InDesign, it doesn't go down... but it kind of goes down, and a little bit more. So it's kind of hard to get this thing to work. So what you need to do, before you click Page Down... hold down your 'Option' key on a Mac, or 'Alt' on a PC... do the exact same thing... but you can see, the Spread stays right in the middle. So much handier zooming through the document. Now, a side note, if you're on a MacBook Pro like me... and you don't have the Page Down key... because there's just no room on the keyboard... or any other laptop that doesn't have the Page Down key... it's 'Function', the key is in the bottom left of your keyboard. Then hold down 'Option', and then use your up and down arrows. They become Page Up, Page Down. So rock on, next tip. Hope this one's not too obscure, I use it loads. All of these documents that are open, these three tabs... they're all not saved. I can tell they're not saved because of that little asterisk next to them. But I need you to go, I actually need to save them all, and close them all. The shortcut is pretty much all the keys, and 'S'. So I'm on a Mac, so it's 'Command Option Shift S', saves them all. And 'Command Option Shift W' closes them all. If you're on a PC, it's 'Control Alt Shift'. 'S' for save... and then, all those again, with 'W' to close them all. Sometimes I wonder how I learn these shortcuts... and is it really a shortcut, when you got to remember all those keys? Anyway, hope somebody finds that one helpful. This shortcut has a few different features to it. I'm going to grab the 'Rectangle' tool, and I want to draw this out. By default it's given me a line around the outside, and no Fills. So I want to toggle between my Fill and Stroke... and this can be really fiddly, because it's quite small. Especially this teeny tiny one over there. But if you just tap the 'X' key on your keyboard... brings the Fill to the front, and the Stroke to the front... and the Fill to the front. So I can go like this without having-- I can say I want to fill it with red... and then I'm going to tap 'X', and then put a 'None' Stroke. I don't have to go up and try and click it to bring it to the front. If you just got it the wrong way around, and you draw something... and you're like, "I wish it was just a green Fill, and no Stroke." You can hold 'Shift X', and it just switches those two around. Just like this little arrow here. So 'X' and 'Shift X', highs and lows... especially in Photoshop and Illustrator... the same shortcuts go across to those. Another shortcut that lots of people use, that I don't... with it selected, 'Black Arrow' selected... you got your comma, period, and forward slash. If I type in period '.' and it's a Gradient, if I type in a comma ',' it puts in a Fill. And if I put in the forward slash '/' it removes the Fill. If I click on this, forward slash, the Fill is gone. Which I can see is useful. Period though, adding a Gradient... nobody likes you, black to white Gradient. I guess that's a bit harsh. Next tip. So you need to start a new job for a new client... or just a new job for an existing client... and you're about to start, creating a new folder... when you remember the cool tip that Dan said. So what I've got is, in my document, this folder. It's called 'New Job', inside 'New Job', it's got all the folders that I need... to get a project going. There's nothing in them, they're just empty, ready to go. So what I can do, is back here, I can copy 'New Job', 'Copy', 'Paste'. And I'm going to work on a new client called 'Green at Heart'. And I've got the structure ready to go. I put all my InDesign files, it's not working. I put any copy that I get from my client into 'Copy' folder. 'Files' is generally images. 'Reference' might be the old jobs or PDFs the client had. 'Sent to Client' is PDFs that I've sent to them to proof. 'Sent to Supplier' is stuff I've sent off to the printer. 'Site Files' are used when I'm doing web work. You can totally adjust this to what you need. One of the little things I do though... is in 'Files', 'Working', there's the 'Zold' folder. And it's just old work, with a Z at the front... so it's at the bottom of the folder structure. And I just use that for-- say I'm doing concepts for a client... and I got A, B, and C versions in my working... and the client picks version B, I chuck A and C in here. Just to hide them away. I haven't deleted them, they're just hiding in 'Zold', so I know that... when I come back to this job in two years... I know which files I'm meant to be using. The last tip, and it's the best one. So this is the tip, the shortcut, that I use the most. It's called Quick Apply. There's a couple of instances where you'd use it. Let's say there's a heading down here. I know I want it to be my Subheading... that I've set up a Paragraph Style for... but instead of having to go find 'Window', 'Style', 'Paragraph Styles'... and then highlight it... I can just select it, and go 'Command Enter'. If you're on a PC, it's 'Control Enter'... and it brings up this thing called Quick Apply. So what I'll do is, I'll just type in 'sub'. I'm just typing in the name of the Paragraph Style that I created. You can see, it has hit 'enter'. Becomes really good when we have to put it loads of time. 'Command Enter', and because it's already got there, 'Enter'. Where's another one? Click another one there, you can get quicker, 'Command Enter', 'Enter'. And I can start banging in my Paragraph Style super quick. I can see that this thing here is a bit messed up... in terms of the Paragraph Style. I'm going to hit 'Command Enter', and type in 'body'. You can see there, my Body Copy style, hit 'return'. What I also might do, is make all these upper case... I'm going to highlight this. 'Command Enter', and just type 'upper'. You can see, it's gone straight to upper case, hit 'return'. Do the same thing with this one. And because it's already pre-loaded... I can start putting these things in super quick. We love you, Quick Apply. That's it for the tips. Now I'll pass you over to the real version of me. Hidden shoulders, and all. Wow, wasn't that a really good Cheat Sheet. If you like that, there's lots more at bringyourownlaptop.com Printed versions of that Cheat Sheet... plus lots of other Cheat Sheets... for lots of other Adobe and Microsoft products. I'm waving my hands around. That means you've got to go to bringyourownlaptop.com Sorry about the hands.